TWI837205B - Laser processing device and laser processing method - Google Patents

Laser processing device and laser processing method Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TWI837205B
TWI837205B TW108139221A TW108139221A TWI837205B TW I837205 B TWI837205 B TW I837205B TW 108139221 A TW108139221 A TW 108139221A TW 108139221 A TW108139221 A TW 108139221A TW I837205 B TWI837205 B TW I837205B
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
orientation
area
line
laser processing
light
Prior art date
Application number
TW108139221A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Other versions
TW202033303A (en
Inventor
坂本剛志
是松克洋
Original Assignee
日商濱松赫德尼古斯股份有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP2018234816A external-priority patent/JP7120904B2/en
Application filed by 日商濱松赫德尼古斯股份有限公司 filed Critical 日商濱松赫德尼古斯股份有限公司
Publication of TW202033303A publication Critical patent/TW202033303A/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of TWI837205B publication Critical patent/TWI837205B/en

Links

Images

Abstract

雷射加工裝置具備有支承部、照射部及控制部。照射部係具有成形部,該成形部是成形雷射光,使與雷射光的光軸垂直的面內之聚光區域的一部分之形狀具有長度方向。控制部係具有:決定部,其係決定沿著線使聚光區域的一部分相對地移動的情況之長度方向的方位,使長度方向與聚光區域的一部分之移動方向交叉;及調整部,其係在沿著線使聚光區域的一部分相對地移動之期間,調整長度方向的方位,使其成為藉由決定部所決定的方位。The laser processing device includes a support part, an irradiation part, and a control part. The irradiation part includes a shaping part, which shapes the laser light so that the shape of a part of the focusing area in a plane perpendicular to the optical axis of the laser light has a longitudinal direction. The control part includes: a determination part, which determines the longitudinal direction of the part of the focusing area when the part is relatively moved along the line, so that the longitudinal direction intersects with the moving direction of the part of the focusing area; and an adjustment part, which adjusts the longitudinal direction during the period of relatively moving the part of the focusing area along the line so that it becomes the direction determined by the determination part.

Description

雷射加工裝置及雷射加工方法Laser processing device and laser processing method

本發明係關於雷射加工裝置及雷射加工方法。The present invention relates to a laser processing device and a laser processing method.

在專利文獻1,記載有一雷射加工裝置,其具備有:保持工件之保持機構;及對保持於保持機構的工件照射雷射光之雷射光照射機構。在專利文獻1所記載的雷射加工裝置,具有聚光透鏡之雷射光照射機構是對基台固定,沿著與聚光透鏡的光軸垂直的方向之工件的移動,是藉由保持機構實施。 [先前技術文獻] [專利文獻]Patent document 1 describes a laser processing device, which has: a holding mechanism for holding a workpiece; and a laser light irradiation mechanism for irradiating laser light to the workpiece held by the holding mechanism. In the laser processing device described in Patent document 1, the laser light irradiation mechanism having a focusing lens is fixed to a base, and the movement of the workpiece in a direction perpendicular to the optical axis of the focusing lens is implemented by the holding mechanism. [Prior art document] [Patent document]

[專利文獻1] 日本專利第5456510號公報[Patent Document 1] Japanese Patent No. 5456510

[發明所欲解決之課題][The problem that the invention wants to solve]

又,在例如半導體裝置的製造製程,會有實施從半導體晶圓去除作為不要部分之其外緣部分的修整加工的情況。但,為了從對象物去除該外緣部分,若藉由沿著在對象物的外緣之內側呈環狀延伸的線,使雷射光的聚光點相對地移動,沿著該線形成改質區域的話,則會有去除了外緣部分之對象物的修整面的品質會依據部位不同而降低之虞。In addition, in the manufacturing process of semiconductor devices, for example, trimming is performed to remove the outer edge portion of a semiconductor wafer as an unnecessary portion. However, if the focal point of laser light is relatively moved along a line extending in a ring shape inside the outer edge of the object to remove the outer edge portion from the object and a modified area is formed along the line, the quality of the trimmed surface of the object from which the outer edge portion has been removed may be degraded depending on the location.

因此,本發明的一態樣的課題係在於提供可抑制去除了外緣部分之對象物的修整面的品質會依據部位不同而降低的情事之雷射加工裝置及雷射加工方法。 [用以解決課題之手段]Therefore, one aspect of the present invention is to provide a laser processing device and a laser processing method that can suppress the situation where the quality of the trimmed surface of an object with the outer edge portion removed is reduced depending on the location. [Means for solving the problem]

本發明的一態樣之雷射加工裝置係藉由使至少聚光區域的一部分配合對象物而照射雷射光,在對象物形成改質區域之雷射加工裝置,其特徵為具備有:支承部,其係支承對象物;照射部,其係對藉由支承部所支承的對象物照射雷射光;及控制部,其係控制支承部與照射部,照射部係具有成形部,該成形部是成形雷射光,使與雷射光的光軸垂直的面內之聚光區域的一部分之形狀具有長度方向,控制部係具有:決定部,其係依據關於對象物的對象物資訊、及關於沿著在對象物的外緣的內側呈環狀延伸的線使聚光區域的一部分相對地移動的情況之線的線資訊,決定沿著線使聚光區域的一部分相對地移動的情況之長度方向的方位,使得長度方向與聚光區域的一部分之移動方向交叉;及調整部,其係在沿著線使聚光區域的一部分相對地移動的期間,調整長度方向的方位,使其成為藉由決定部所決定的方位。A laser processing device according to one embodiment of the present invention is a laser processing device that forms a modified area on an object by irradiating laser light with at least a portion of a focusing area that matches an object, and is characterized by comprising: a support portion that supports the object; an irradiation portion that irradiates laser light to the object supported by the support portion; and a control portion that controls the support portion and the irradiation portion, wherein the irradiation portion has a shaping portion that shapes the laser light so that a portion of the focusing area within a plane perpendicular to the optical axis of the laser light has a longitudinal direction, and the control portion is The invention comprises: a determining unit, which determines the orientation in the length direction of the case where a part of the focusing area is relatively moved along the line based on object information about the object and line information about the line extending in a ring shape on the inner side of the outer edge of the object so that the length direction intersects with the moving direction of the part of the focusing area; and an adjusting unit, which adjusts the orientation in the length direction during the period of relatively moving the part of the focusing area along the line so that the orientation becomes the orientation determined by the determining unit.

在此雷射加工裝置,在沿著線使聚光區域的一部分相對地移動的期間,與雷射光的光軸呈垂直的面內之聚光區域的一部分之形狀(以下亦稱為[光束形狀])的長度方向上之方位被調整成為與聚光區域的一部分之移動方向(以下,亦稱為加工行進方向)交叉的方位,亦即依據對象物資訊及線資訊所決定之方位。因此,僅在光束形狀的長度方向與加工行進方向一致的狀態下,沿著線,使聚光區域的一部分相對地移動,使得在例如因對象物的物性,依據部位不同引起修整面之品質降低這種情況,也能抑制這種修整面的品質降低。因可抑制去除了外緣部分之對象物的修整面的品質會依據部位不同而降低的情事。In this laser processing device, while a part of the focusing area is relatively moved along a line, the orientation in the longitudinal direction of the shape of a part of the focusing area in a plane perpendicular to the optical axis of the laser light (hereinafter also referred to as the "beam shape") is adjusted to an orientation that intersects with the moving direction of the part of the focusing area (hereinafter also referred to as the processing direction), that is, an orientation determined based on the object information and the line information. Therefore, only when the longitudinal direction of the beam shape is consistent with the processing direction, a part of the focusing area is relatively moved along the line, so that even if the quality of the trimmed surface is degraded depending on the part due to the physical properties of the object, the deterioration of the quality of the trimmed surface can be suppressed. This can suppress the deterioration of the quality of the trimmed surface of the object from which the outer edge portion has been removed depending on the part.

在本發明的一態樣之雷射加工裝置,亦可為對象物資訊係包含關於對象物的結晶方位之資訊,線資訊係包含關於聚光區域的一部分的移動方向之資訊。藉此,即使在對象物具有結晶方位之情況,亦可抑制對象物的修整面的品質依據部位不同而降低的情事。In one aspect of the laser processing device of the present invention, the object information may include information on the crystal orientation of the object, and the line information may include information on the moving direction of a part of the focusing area. Thus, even if the object has a crystal orientation, it is possible to suppress the quality of the trimmed surface of the object from being reduced depending on the location.

在本發明的一態樣之雷射加工裝置,亦可為成形部係包含空間光調變器,調整部藉由控制空間光調變器,調整長度方向的方位。藉此,可確實地調整與雷射光的光軸垂直的面內之聚光區域的一部分之形狀的長度方向的方位。In one aspect of the laser processing device of the present invention, the shaping unit may include a spatial light modulator, and the adjusting unit may adjust the longitudinal direction by controlling the spatial light modulator, thereby accurately adjusting the longitudinal direction of the shape of a part of the focusing area in a plane perpendicular to the optical axis of the laser light.

本發明的一態樣之雷射加工裝置,亦可為決定部係決定沿著線的第1區域使聚光區域的一部分相對地移動的情況之長度方向的方位亦即第1方位、和沿著線的第2區域使聚光區域的一部分相對地移動的情況之長度方向的方位亦即第2方位,調整部係在沿著線使聚光區域的一部分相對地移動的期間,於聚光區域的一部分位於第1區域的情況,將長度方向的方位調整成為第1方位,於聚光區域的一部分位於第2區域的情況,將長度方向的方位調整成為第2方位。藉此,可更確實地抑制分別在第1區域及第2區域中,對象物的修整面的品質降低的情事。In the laser processing device of one aspect of the present invention, the determining unit may determine the first orientation in the longitudinal direction when a part of the light-collecting area is relatively moved along the first area of the line, and the second orientation in the longitudinal direction when a part of the light-collecting area is relatively moved along the second area of the line, and the adjusting unit may adjust the orientation in the longitudinal direction to the first orientation when a part of the light-collecting area is located in the first area, and adjust the orientation in the longitudinal direction to the second orientation when a part of the light-collecting area is located in the second area during the period of relatively moving the part of the light-collecting area along the line. In this way, the quality of the trimmed surface of the object in the first area and the second area may be more reliably suppressed from being degraded.

在本發明的一態樣之雷射加工裝置,亦可為對象物係以(100)面作為主面,具有與一方的(110)面垂直第1結晶方位及與另一方的(110)面垂直的第2結晶方位之晶圓,線係在從與主面垂直的方向觀看之情況時,呈圓環狀延伸,第1區域係在沿著線使聚光區域的一部分相對地移動之情況,包含聚光區域的一部分之移動方向對第1結晶方位之角度亦即加工角度為0°以上、未滿45°之區域,第2區域係在沿著線使聚光區域的一部分相對地移動之情況,包含加工角度為45°以上、未滿90°之區域。藉此,即使在對象物為以(100)面作為主面的晶圓之情況,亦可抑制對象物的修整面的品質依據部位不同而降低的情事。In one embodiment of the laser processing device of the present invention, the target object is a wafer having a (100) plane as the main plane, a first crystal orientation perpendicular to the (110) plane on one side and a second crystal orientation perpendicular to the (110) plane on the other side. The line extends in a circular ring shape when viewed from a direction perpendicular to the main plane. The first region is a region in which the angle of the movement direction of a part of the focusing area to the first crystal orientation, that is, the processing angle, is greater than 0° and less than 45° when a part of the focusing area is relatively moved along the line. The second region is a region in which the processing angle is greater than 45° and less than 90° when a part of the focusing area is relatively moved along the line. Thereby, even when the object is a wafer having a (100) plane as a main surface, it is possible to suppress the quality of the trimmed surface of the object from being degraded depending on the location.

在本發明的一態樣之雷射加工裝置,亦可為第1方位及第2方位係為以第1結晶方位及第2結晶方位中之與移動方向之間所形成的角度較大的方向接近的方式,對移動方向傾斜之方向的方位。藉此,即使在對象物為以(100)面作為主面的晶圓之情況,亦可更確實地抑制在第1區域及第2區域中,對象物的修整面的品質降低的情事。In a laser processing device of one aspect of the present invention, the first orientation and the second orientation may be directions inclined with respect to the moving direction so as to be close to the direction with a larger angle formed between the first crystal orientation and the second crystal orientation. Thus, even when the object is a wafer having a (100) plane as a main surface, it is possible to more reliably suppress the degradation of the quality of the trimmed surface of the object in the first region and the second region.

在本發明的一態樣之雷射加工裝置,亦可為第1方位及第2方位係為以第1結晶方位及第2結晶方位中之與移動方向之間所形成的角度較大的方向接近的方式,從移動方向傾斜10°~35°之方向的方位。藉此,即使在對象物為以(100)面作為主面的晶圓之情況,亦可更確實地抑制在第1區域及第2區域中,對象物的修整面的品質降低的情事。In a laser processing device of one aspect of the present invention, the first orientation and the second orientation may be an orientation inclined by 10° to 35° from the moving direction in such a manner that the first crystal orientation and the second crystal orientation are close to the direction with a larger angle with the moving direction. Thus, even when the object is a wafer with a (100) plane as the main surface, it is possible to more reliably suppress the degradation of the trimmed surface of the object in the first region and the second region.

在本發明的雷射加工裝置,亦可為調整部係在沿著線使聚光區域的一部分相對地移動的期間,以連續地改變的方式,調整長度方向的方位。藉此,可更確實地抑制在線的各部位,對象物的修整面之品質降低。In the laser processing device of the present invention, the adjustment section can adjust the longitudinal direction in a continuously changing manner while relatively moving a part of the focusing area along the line. This can more reliably suppress the quality reduction of the trimmed surface of the object at each part of the line.

在本發明的一態樣之雷射加工裝置,亦可為對象物係以(100)面作為主面,具有與一方的(110)面垂直第1結晶方位及與另一方的(110)面垂直的第2結晶方位之晶圓,決定部係針對每個聚光區域的一部分之移動方向對第1結晶方位的角度亦即加工角度,決定沿著線使聚光區域的一部分相對地移動的情況之長度方向的方位,調整部係在沿著線使聚光區域的一部分相對地移動的期間,因應加工角度,連續地改變成為藉由決定部所決定的方位。藉此,即使在對象物為以(100)面作為主面的晶圓之情況,亦可更確實地抑制在線的各部位,對象物的修整面的品質降低的情事。In a laser processing device of one aspect of the present invention, the object may be a wafer having a (100) plane as a main surface, a first crystal orientation perpendicular to one (110) plane and a second crystal orientation perpendicular to the other (110) plane, the determining unit determines the orientation in the length direction of the case where a part of the focusing area is relatively moved along the line, with respect to the angle of the moving direction of a part of each focusing area to the first crystal orientation, that is, the processing angle, and the adjusting unit continuously changes the orientation determined by the determining unit in accordance with the processing angle while the part of the focusing area is relatively moved along the line. Thus, even when the object is a wafer having a (100) plane as a main surface, it is possible to more reliably suppress the quality of the trimmed surface of the object from being degraded at each part of the line.

本發明的一態樣之雷射加工方法,係藉由使至少聚光區域的一部分配合對象物而照射雷射光,在對象物形成改質區域之雷射加工方法,其特徵為具備:決定製程,其係據關於對象物的對象物資訊、及關於沿著在對象物的外緣的內側呈環狀延伸的線使聚光區域的一部分相對地移動的情況之線的線資訊,決定沿著線使聚光區域的一部分相對地移動的情況之長度方向的方位,使與雷射光的光軸垂直的面內之聚光區域的一部分之形狀所具有的長度方向與聚光區域的一部分之移動方向交叉;及調整製程,其係在沿著線使聚光區域的一部分相對地移動的期間,調整長度方向的方位,使其成為已被決定的方位。A laser processing method according to one aspect of the present invention is a laser processing method for forming a modified area in an object by irradiating laser light with at least a portion of a focusing area in cooperation with an object, and is characterized by comprising: a determination process for determining the orientation in the length direction of the case where a portion of the focusing area is relatively moved along a line based on object information about the object and line information about a line extending in a ring shape on the inner side of an outer edge of the object so that the length direction of the shape of a portion of the focusing area in a plane perpendicular to the optical axis of the laser light intersects with the moving direction of the portion of the focusing area; and an adjustment process for adjusting the orientation in the length direction while a portion of the focusing area is relatively moved along the line so that the orientation becomes the determined orientation.

在此雷射加工方法,在沿著線使聚光區域的一部分相對地移動的期間,將光束形狀的長度方向的方位調整成為與加工行進方向交叉的方位,亦即依據對象物資訊及線資訊所決定之方位。因此,僅在光束形狀的長度方向與加工行進方向一致的狀態下,沿著線,使聚光區域的一部分相對地移動,使得在例如因對象物的物性,依據部位不同引起修整面之品質降低這種情況,也能抑制這種修整面的品質降低。因可抑制去除了外緣部分之對象物的修整面的品質會依據部位不同而降低的情事。 [發明效果]In this laser processing method, while a part of the focusing area is relatively moved along the line, the longitudinal direction of the beam shape is adjusted to an orientation that intersects the processing direction, that is, an orientation determined according to the object information and the line information. Therefore, only when the longitudinal direction of the beam shape is consistent with the processing direction, a part of the focusing area is relatively moved along the line, so that in the case where the quality of the trimmed surface is reduced depending on the part due to the physical properties of the object, for example, the quality reduction of the trimmed surface can be suppressed. Because the quality of the trimmed surface of the object with the outer edge portion removed is reduced depending on the part, it can be suppressed. [Effect of the invention]

若依據本發明的一態樣,能夠提供可抑制去除了外緣部分之對象物的修整面的品質會依據部位不同而降低的情事之雷射加工裝置及雷射加工方法。According to one aspect of the present invention, it is possible to provide a laser processing device and a laser processing method that can suppress the situation where the quality of the trimmed surface of an object from which the outer edge portion has been removed is degraded depending on the location.

以下,參照圖面等,詳細地說明關於實施形態。再者,在各圖中,會有對相同或相當的部分賦予相同的符號,並省略重複之說明之情況。Hereinafter, the embodiments will be described in detail with reference to the drawings, etc. In the drawings, the same or corresponding parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and repeated descriptions will be omitted.

首先,說明關於雷射加工裝置的基本結構、作用效果及變形例。First, the basic structure, effects, and variations of the laser processing device are described.

[雷射加工裝置之結構] 如圖1所示,雷射加工裝置1,係具備有複數個移動機構5、6;支承部7;1對雷射加工頭(第1雷射加工頭、第2雷射加工頭)10A、10B;光源單元8;及控制部9。以下的說明,將第1方向稱為X方向、與第1方向垂直的第2方向稱為Y方向、與第1方向及第2方向垂直的第3方向稱為Z方向。在本實施形態,X方向及Y方向為水平方向,Z方向為垂直方向。[Structure of laser processing device] As shown in FIG1 , the laser processing device 1 has a plurality of moving mechanisms 5, 6; a support portion 7; a pair of laser processing heads (first laser processing head, second laser processing head) 10A, 10B; a light source unit 8; and a control portion 9. In the following description, the first direction is referred to as the X direction, the second direction perpendicular to the first direction is referred to as the Y direction, and the third direction perpendicular to the first direction and the second direction is referred to as the Z direction. In the present embodiment, the X direction and the Y direction are horizontal directions, and the Z direction is a vertical direction.

移動機構5係具有固定部51、移動部53及安裝部55。固定部51係安裝於裝置框架1a。移動部53係安裝於設在固定部51的軌道,可沿著Y方向移動。安裝部55係安裝於設在移動部53的軌道,可沿著X方向移動。The moving mechanism 5 includes a fixed portion 51, a moving portion 53, and a mounting portion 55. The fixed portion 51 is mounted on the device frame 1a. The moving portion 53 is mounted on a track provided on the fixed portion 51 and is movable in the Y direction. The mounting portion 55 is mounted on a track provided on the moving portion 53 and is movable in the X direction.

移動機構6係具有固定部61;1對移動部(第1移動部、第2移動部)63、64;及1對安裝部(第1安裝部、第2安裝部)65、66。固定部61係安裝於裝置框架1a。1對移動部63、64分別安裝於設在固定部61的軌道,各自獨立而可沿著Y方向移動。安裝部65係安裝於設在移動部63的軌道,可沿著Z方向移動。安裝部66係安裝於設在移動部64的軌道,可沿著Z方向移動。亦即,對於裝置框架1a,1對安裝部65、66分別可沿著Y方向及Z方向移動。移動部63、64分別構成第1及第2水平移動機構(水平移動機構)。安裝部65、66分別構成第1及第2垂直移動機構(垂直移動機構)。The moving mechanism 6 has a fixed portion 61; a pair of moving portions (a first moving portion and a second moving portion) 63, 64; and a pair of mounting portions (a first mounting portion and a second mounting portion) 65, 66. The fixed portion 61 is mounted on the device frame 1a. The pair of moving portions 63, 64 are respectively mounted on rails provided on the fixed portion 61, and are each independently movable in the Y direction. The mounting portion 65 is mounted on the rail provided on the moving portion 63, and is movable in the Z direction. The mounting portion 66 is mounted on the rail provided on the moving portion 64, and is movable in the Z direction. That is, with respect to the device frame 1a, a pair of mounting portions 65, 66 are movable in the Y direction and the Z direction, respectively. The moving portions 63, 64 constitute the first and second horizontal moving mechanisms (horizontal moving mechanisms), respectively. The mounting portions 65 and 66 constitute the first and second vertical movement mechanisms (vertical movement mechanisms), respectively.

支承部7係安裝於設在移動機構5的安裝部55之旋轉軸,能以與Z方向平行的軸線作為中心線而進行旋轉。亦即,支承部7係可分別沿著X方向及Y方向移動,能以與Z方向平行的軸線作為中心線而進行旋轉。支承部7係用來支承對象物100。對象物100,例如為晶圓。The support part 7 is mounted on the rotation axis of the mounting part 55 provided on the moving mechanism 5, and can rotate with the axis parallel to the Z direction as the center line. That is, the support part 7 can move along the X direction and the Y direction respectively, and can rotate with the axis parallel to the Z direction as the center line. The support part 7 is used to support the object 100. The object 100 is, for example, a wafer.

如圖1及圖2所示,雷射加工頭10A係安裝於移動機構6的安裝部65。雷射加工頭10A係在Z方向上與支承部7相對向的狀態下,對支承於支承部7之對象物100照射雷射光L1(亦稱為「第1雷射光L1」)。雷射加工頭10B係安裝於移動機構6的安裝部66。雷射加工頭10B係在Z方向上與支承部7相對向的狀態下,對支承於支承部7之對象物100照射雷射光L2(亦稱為「第2雷射光L2」)。雷射加工頭10A、10B構成照射部。As shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 , the laser processing head 10A is mounted on the mounting portion 65 of the moving mechanism 6. The laser processing head 10A irradiates the object 100 supported by the support portion 7 with laser light L1 (also referred to as "first laser light L1") while being opposed to the support portion 7 in the Z direction. The laser processing head 10B is mounted on the mounting portion 66 of the moving mechanism 6. The laser processing head 10B irradiates the object 100 supported by the support portion 7 with laser light L2 (also referred to as "second laser light L2") while being opposed to the support portion 7 in the Z direction. The laser processing heads 10A and 10B constitute an irradiation portion.

光源單元8具有1對光源81、82。光源81係輸出雷射光L1。雷射光L1係自光源81的射出部81a射出,藉由光纖2導引至雷射加工頭10A。光源82係輸出雷射光L2。雷射光L2係自光源82的射出部82a射出,藉由其他光纖2導引至雷射加工頭10B。The light source unit 8 has a pair of light sources 81 and 82. The light source 81 outputs laser light L1. The laser light L1 is emitted from the emission portion 81a of the light source 81 and guided to the laser processing head 10A through the optical fiber 2. The light source 82 outputs laser light L2. The laser light L2 is emitted from the emission portion 82a of the light source 82 and guided to the laser processing head 10B through the other optical fiber 2.

控制部9係用來控制雷射加工裝置1的各部(支承部7、複數個移動機構5、6、1對雷射加工頭10A、10B、及光源單元8等)等。控制部9係作為包含處理器、記憶體、儲存器及通信裝置等之電腦裝置構成。在控制部9,加載於記憶體等的軟體(程式)是藉由處理器執行,記憶體及儲存器之資料的讀取及寫入以及藉由通訊裝置之通訊是藉由處理器控制。藉此,控制部9能夠達到各種功能。The control unit 9 is used to control the various parts of the laser processing device 1 (supporting part 7, multiple moving mechanisms 5, 6, a pair of laser processing heads 10A, 10B, and light source unit 8, etc.). The control unit 9 is composed of a computer device including a processor, a memory, a storage, and a communication device. In the control unit 9, the software (program) loaded on the memory, etc. is executed by the processor, and the reading and writing of data in the memory and storage and the communication through the communication device are controlled by the processor. In this way, the control unit 9 can achieve various functions.

說明關於藉由如以上所構成的雷射加工裝置1進行加工的一例。該加工的一例,係為了將作為晶圓的對象物100裁切成複數個晶片,沿著設定成格子狀的複數個線,在對象物100的內部形成改質區域之例子。An example of processing performed by the laser processing apparatus 1 configured as above will be described. The example of processing is an example of forming a modified region inside the object 100 along a plurality of lines arranged in a grid shape in order to cut the object 100 as a wafer into a plurality of chips.

首先,移動機構5使支承部7分別沿著X方向及Y方向移動,讓支承對象物100之支承部7在Z方向上與1對雷射加工頭10A、10B相對向。接著,移動機構5以與Z方向平行的軸線作為中心線而使支承部7旋轉,讓在對象物100上朝一方向延伸的複數個線沿著X方向。First, the moving mechanism 5 moves the support 7 in the X direction and the Y direction respectively, so that the support 7 supporting the object 100 faces the pair of laser processing heads 10A and 10B in the Z direction. Then, the moving mechanism 5 rotates the support 7 with an axis parallel to the Z direction as the center line, so that a plurality of lines extending in one direction on the object 100 are along the X direction.

然後,移動機構6使雷射加工頭10A沿著Y方向移動,使雷射光L1的聚光點(聚光區域的一部分)位在朝一方向延伸的一條線上。另外,為了讓雷射光L2的聚光點位於朝一方向延伸的其他線上,移動機構6使雷射加工頭10B沿著Y方向移動。然後,移動機構6使雷射加工頭10A沿著Z方向移動,使雷射光L1的聚光點位於對象物100的內部。另外,移動機構6使雷射加工頭10B沿著Z方向移動,使雷射光L2的聚光點位於對象物100的內部。Then, the moving mechanism 6 moves the laser processing head 10A along the Y direction so that the focal point (a part of the focal area) of the laser light L1 is located on a line extending in one direction. In addition, in order to make the focal point of the laser light L2 located on another line extending in one direction, the moving mechanism 6 moves the laser processing head 10B along the Y direction. Then, the moving mechanism 6 moves the laser processing head 10A along the Z direction so that the focal point of the laser light L1 is located inside the object 100. In addition, the moving mechanism 6 moves the laser processing head 10B along the Z direction so that the focal point of the laser light L2 is located inside the object 100.

接著,光源81輸出雷射光L1而雷射加工頭10A對對象物100照射雷射光L1,並且光源82輸出雷射光L2而雷射加工頭10B對對象物100照射雷射光L2。與此同時,移動機構5使支承部7沿著X方向移動,使雷射光L1的聚光點沿著朝一方向延伸的一條線相對地移動,並且使雷射光L2的聚光點沿著朝一方向延伸的其他線相對地移動。如此,雷射加工裝置1係在對象物100內,分別沿著朝一方向延伸的複數個線,在對象物100的內部形成改質區域。Then, the light source 81 outputs the laser light L1 and the laser processing head 10A irradiates the laser light L1 to the object 100, and the light source 82 outputs the laser light L2 and the laser processing head 10B irradiates the laser light L2 to the object 100. At the same time, the moving mechanism 5 moves the support 7 along the X direction, so that the focal point of the laser light L1 moves relatively along a line extending in one direction, and the focal point of the laser light L2 moves relatively along other lines extending in one direction. In this way, the laser processing device 1 forms a modified area inside the object 100 along a plurality of lines extending in one direction in the object 100.

接著,移動機構5以與Z方向平行的軸線作為中心線而使支承部7旋轉,讓在對象物100上朝與一方向正交的另一方向延伸的複數個線沿著X方向。Next, the moving mechanism 5 rotates the support portion 7 with the axis parallel to the Z direction as the center line so that a plurality of lines extending in another direction perpendicular to the one direction on the object 100 are along the X direction.

然後,移動機構6使雷射加工頭10A沿著Y方向移動,使雷射光L1的聚光點位在朝另一方向延伸的一條線上。另外,為了讓雷射光L2的聚光點位於朝另一方向延伸的其他線上,移動機構6使雷射加工頭10B沿著Y方向移動。然後,移動機構6使雷射加工頭10A沿著Z方向移動,使雷射光L1的聚光點位於對象物100的內部。另外,移動機構6使雷射加工頭10B沿著Z方向移動,使雷射光L2的聚光點位於對象物100的內部。Then, the moving mechanism 6 moves the laser processing head 10A along the Y direction so that the focal point of the laser light L1 is located on a line extending in another direction. In addition, in order to make the focal point of the laser light L2 located on another line extending in another direction, the moving mechanism 6 moves the laser processing head 10B along the Y direction. Then, the moving mechanism 6 moves the laser processing head 10A along the Z direction so that the focal point of the laser light L1 is located inside the object 100. In addition, the moving mechanism 6 moves the laser processing head 10B along the Z direction so that the focal point of the laser light L2 is located inside the object 100.

接著,光源81輸出雷射光L1而雷射加工頭10A對對象物100照射雷射光L1,並且光源82輸出雷射光L2而雷射加工頭10B對對象物100照射雷射光L2。與此同時,移動機構5使支承部7沿著X方向移動,使雷射光L1的聚光點沿著朝另一方向延伸的一條線相對地移動,並且使雷射光L2的聚光點沿著朝另一方向延伸的其他線相對地移動。如此,雷射加工裝置1係在對象物100內,分別沿著朝與一方向正交的另一方向延伸的複數個線,在對象物100的內部形成改質區域。Then, the light source 81 outputs the laser light L1 and the laser processing head 10A irradiates the laser light L1 to the object 100, and the light source 82 outputs the laser light L2 and the laser processing head 10B irradiates the laser light L2 to the object 100. At the same time, the moving mechanism 5 moves the support 7 along the X direction, moves the focal point of the laser light L1 relatively along a line extending in another direction, and moves the focal point of the laser light L2 relatively along other lines extending in another direction. In this way, the laser processing device 1 forms a modified area inside the object 100 along a plurality of lines extending in another direction orthogonal to the one direction.

再者,在前述加工的一例,光源81係藉由例如脈衝振盪方式,對對象物100,輸出具有透過性之雷射光L1,光源82係藉由例如脈衝振盪方式,對對象物100,輸出具有透過性之雷射光L2。若這樣的雷射光聚光於對象物100的內部的話,則在與雷射光的聚光點對應之部分,特別是雷射光被吸收,在對象物100的內部形成改質區域。改質區域係密度、折射率、機械性強度、其他的物理特性等形成為與周圍的非改質區域不同之區域。作為改質區域,具有例如熔融處理區域、龜裂區域、絕緣破壞區域、折射率變化區域等。Furthermore, in an example of the aforementioned processing, the light source 81 outputs a laser light L1 having transparency to the object 100 by, for example, a pulse oscillation method, and the light source 82 outputs a laser light L2 having transparency to the object 100 by, for example, a pulse oscillation method. If such laser light is focused inside the object 100, then in the portion corresponding to the focal point of the laser light, in particular, the laser light is absorbed, and a modified region is formed inside the object 100. The modified region is a region whose density, refractive index, mechanical strength, other physical properties, etc. are different from the surrounding non-modified regions. The modified region includes, for example, a melt-processed region, a cracked region, an insulation-damaged region, a refractive index-changed region, and the like.

藉由脈衝振盪方式所輸出的雷射光照射至對象物100,沿著設定於對象物100的線,使雷射光的聚光點相對地移動的話,則複數個改質點形成為沿著線排列成1列。1個改質點係藉由1脈衝的雷射光的照射所形成。1列的改質區域係為排列成1列之複數個改質點的集合。相鄰的改質點係藉由雷射光的聚光點對對象物100之相對的移動速度及雷射光的反覆頻率,即使在相連的情況或分離的情況皆存在。所設定的線之形狀,不限於格子狀,亦可為環狀、直線狀、曲線狀及該等形狀的至少某些形狀組合之形狀。 [雷射加工頭之結構]Laser light outputted by pulse oscillation is irradiated onto the object 100. If the focal point of the laser light is relatively moved along a line set on the object 100, a plurality of modified points are formed and arranged in a row along the line. One modified point is formed by irradiation with one pulse of laser light. A row of modified areas is a collection of a plurality of modified points arranged in a row. Adjacent modified points exist in a connected or separated situation by the relative moving speed of the focal point of the laser light to the object 100 and the repetition frequency of the laser light. The shape of the set line is not limited to a grid shape, and may also be a ring shape, a straight line shape, a curve shape, or a combination of at least some of these shapes. [Structure of laser processing head]

如圖3及圖4所示,雷射加工頭10A具備框體11、射入部12、調整部13及聚光部14。As shown in FIG. 3 and FIG. 4 , the laser machining head 10A includes a housing 11 , an incident portion 12 , an adjustment portion 13 , and a focusing portion 14 .

框體11具有第1壁部21及第2壁部22、第3壁部23及第4壁部24、以及第5壁部25及第6壁部26。第1壁部21及第2壁部22係在X方向上互相對向。第3壁部23及第4壁部24係在Y方向上互相對向。第5壁部25及第6壁部26係在Z方向上互相對向。The frame 11 has a first wall 21 and a second wall 22, a third wall 23 and a fourth wall 24, and a fifth wall 25 and a sixth wall 26. The first wall 21 and the second wall 22 are opposed to each other in the X direction. The third wall 23 and the fourth wall 24 are opposed to each other in the Y direction. The fifth wall 25 and the sixth wall 26 are opposed to each other in the Z direction.

第3壁部23與第4壁部24之距離係較第1壁部21與第2壁部22之距離小。第1壁部21與第2壁部22之距離係較第5壁部25與第6壁部26之距離小。再者,第1壁部21與第2壁部22之距離,可與第5壁部25與第6壁部26之距離相等,亦可較第5壁部25與第6壁部26之距離大。The distance between the third wall portion 23 and the fourth wall portion 24 is smaller than the distance between the first wall portion 21 and the second wall portion 22. The distance between the first wall portion 21 and the second wall portion 22 is smaller than the distance between the fifth wall portion 25 and the sixth wall portion 26. Furthermore, the distance between the first wall portion 21 and the second wall portion 22 may be equal to the distance between the fifth wall portion 25 and the sixth wall portion 26, or may be larger than the distance between the fifth wall portion 25 and the sixth wall portion 26.

在雷射加工頭10A,第1壁部21係位於移動機構6的固定部61側,第2壁部22係位於固定部61相反側。第3壁部23係位於移動機構6的安裝部65側,第4壁部24係位於安裝部65相反側亦即雷射加工頭10B側(參照圖2)。第5壁部25係位於支承部7相反側,第6壁部26係位於支承部7側。In the laser processing head 10A, the first wall portion 21 is located on the fixed portion 61 side of the moving mechanism 6, and the second wall portion 22 is located on the opposite side of the fixed portion 61. The third wall portion 23 is located on the mounting portion 65 side of the moving mechanism 6, and the fourth wall portion 24 is located on the opposite side of the mounting portion 65, that is, on the laser processing head 10B side (see FIG. 2). The fifth wall portion 25 is located on the opposite side of the support portion 7, and the sixth wall portion 26 is located on the support portion 7 side.

框體11係在第3壁部23配置於移動機構6的安裝部65側之狀態下,框體11安裝於安裝部65。具體而言,如以下所述。安裝部65具有座板65a和安裝板65b。座板65a係安裝於設在移動部63的軌道(參照圖2)。安裝板65b係立設於座板65a之雷射加工頭10B側的端部(參照圖2)。框體11係在第3壁部23接觸於安裝板65b之狀態下,經由台座27,將螺栓28螺合於安裝板65b,藉此安裝於安裝部65。台座27係分別設在第1壁部21及第2壁部22。框體11係對安裝部65可進行裝卸。The frame 11 is mounted on the mounting portion 65 when the third wall portion 23 is arranged on the mounting portion 65 side of the moving mechanism 6. Specifically, it is as follows. The mounting portion 65 has a seat plate 65a and a mounting plate 65b. The seat plate 65a is mounted on a rail provided on the moving portion 63 (refer to FIG. 2). The mounting plate 65b is erected on the end of the seat plate 65a on the laser processing head 10B side (refer to FIG. 2). The frame 11 is mounted on the mounting portion 65 by screwing the bolt 28 into the mounting plate 65b via the pedestal 27 when the third wall portion 23 contacts the mounting plate 65b. The pedestal 27 is provided on the first wall portion 21 and the second wall portion 22, respectively. The frame 11 can be loaded and unloaded with respect to the mounting portion 65.

射入部12係安裝於第5壁部25上。射入部12係對框體11內射入雷射光L1。射入部12係在X方向上,靠近第2壁部22側(一方的壁部側),在Y方向上靠近第4壁部24側也就是X方向之射入部12與第2壁部22之距離,係較X方向上之射入部12與第1壁部21之距離小,Y方向上之射入部12與第4壁部24之距離,係較X方向上之射入部12與第3壁部23之距離小。The incident portion 12 is mounted on the fifth wall portion 25. The incident portion 12 injects the laser light L1 into the frame 11. The incident portion 12 is close to the second wall portion 22 side (one wall side) in the X direction and close to the fourth wall portion 24 side in the Y direction. That is, the distance between the incident portion 12 and the second wall portion 22 in the X direction is smaller than the distance between the incident portion 12 and the first wall portion 21 in the X direction, and the distance between the incident portion 12 and the fourth wall portion 24 in the Y direction is smaller than the distance between the incident portion 12 and the third wall portion 23 in the X direction.

射入部12構成為可與光纖2的連接端部2a連接。在光纖2的連接端部2a,設有將自光纖的射出端所射出的雷射光L1進行準直之準直透鏡,未設置抑制返回光之隔離器。該隔離器係設在較連接端部2a更靠近光源81側之光纖的附近。藉此,可謀求連接端部2a的小型化,進而可謀求射入部12之小型化。再者,亦可將隔離器設在光纖2的連接端部2a。The incident portion 12 is configured to be connectable to the connection end 2a of the optical fiber 2. The connection end 2a of the optical fiber 2 is provided with a collimating lens for collimating the laser light L1 emitted from the emission end of the optical fiber, and no isolator for suppressing the return light is provided. The isolator is provided near the optical fiber closer to the light source 81 side than the connection end 2a. In this way, the miniaturization of the connection end 2a can be sought, and the miniaturization of the incident portion 12 can be sought. Furthermore, the isolator can also be provided at the connection end 2a of the optical fiber 2.

調整部13配置在框體11內。調整部13係用來調整自射入部12射入的雷射光L1。調整部13所具有的各結構,安裝於設在框體11內的光學基座29。光學基座29係以將框體11內的區域區隔成第3壁部23側的區域與第4壁部24側的區域的方式,安裝於框體11。光學基座29係與框體11形成為一體。關於調整部13所具有的結構為在第4壁部24側安裝於光學基座29之調整部13所具有的各結構之詳細內容,容後說明。The adjustment section 13 is disposed in the frame 11. The adjustment section 13 is used to adjust the laser light L1 incident from the incident section 12. The various structures of the adjustment section 13 are mounted on the optical base 29 provided in the frame 11. The optical base 29 is mounted on the frame 11 in such a manner that the area in the frame 11 is divided into an area on the third wall 23 side and an area on the fourth wall 24 side. The optical base 29 is formed integrally with the frame 11. The details of the various structures of the adjustment section 13 mounted on the optical base 29 on the fourth wall 24 side will be described later.

聚光部14係配置於第6壁部26上。具體而言,聚光部14係在插通於形成在第6壁部26的孔26a之狀態下,配置於第6壁部26。聚光部14係一邊將藉由調整部13所調整的雷射光L1聚光一邊朝框體11外射出。聚光部14係在X方向上,靠近第2壁部22側(一方的壁部側),在Y方向上靠近第4壁部24側。也就是X方向上之聚光部14與第2壁部22之距離,係較X方向上之聚光部14與第1壁部21之距離小,Y方向上之聚光部14與第4壁部24之距離,係較X方向上之聚光部14與第3壁部23之距離小。The light-collecting portion 14 is disposed on the sixth wall portion 26. Specifically, the light-collecting portion 14 is disposed on the sixth wall portion 26 in a state of being inserted through a hole 26a formed in the sixth wall portion 26. The light-collecting portion 14 collects the laser light L1 adjusted by the adjusting portion 13 and emits it out of the frame 11. The light-collecting portion 14 is close to the second wall portion 22 side (one wall side) in the X direction and close to the fourth wall portion 24 side in the Y direction. That is, the distance between the light-collecting portion 14 and the second wall portion 22 in the X direction is smaller than the distance between the light-collecting portion 14 and the first wall portion 21 in the X direction, and the distance between the light-collecting portion 14 and the fourth wall portion 24 in the Y direction is smaller than the distance between the light-collecting portion 14 and the third wall portion 23 in the X direction.

如圖5所示,調整部13具有衰減器31、擴束器32、和鏡子33。射入部12、以及調整部13的衰減器31、擴束器32及鏡子33係配置於沿著Z方向延伸的直線(第1直線)A1上。衰減器31及擴束器32係在直線A1上,配置於射入部12與鏡子33之間。衰減器31係用來調整自射入部12射入的雷射光L1之輸出。擴束器32係將以衰減器31調整了輸出之雷射光L1的直徑擴大。鏡子33係用來將以擴束器32擴大了直徑雷射光L1進行反射。As shown in FIG5 , the adjustment section 13 has an attenuator 31, a beam expander 32, and a mirror 33. The incident section 12, and the attenuator 31, the beam expander 32, and the mirror 33 of the adjustment section 13 are arranged on a straight line (first straight line) A1 extending along the Z direction. The attenuator 31 and the beam expander 32 are arranged on the straight line A1 between the incident section 12 and the mirror 33. The attenuator 31 is used to adjust the output of the laser light L1 incident from the incident section 12. The beam expander 32 expands the diameter of the laser light L1 whose output is adjusted by the attenuator 31. The mirror 33 is used to reflect the laser light L1 whose diameter is expanded by the beam expander 32.

調整部13還具有反射型空間光調變器34、和成像光學系統35。調整部13的反射型空間光調變器34及成像光學系統35、以及聚光部14係配置於沿著Z方向延伸的直線(第2直線)A2上。反射型空間光調變器34係將以鏡子33進行了反射的雷射光L1調變。反射型空間光調變器34係例如反射型液晶(LCOS:Liquid Crystal on Silicon)的空間光調變器(SLM:Spatial Light Modulator)。成像光學系統35係構成反射型空間光調變器34的反射面34a與聚光部14的入瞳面14a處於成像關係之雙邊遠心光學系統。成像光學系統35係藉由3個以上的透鏡所構成。The adjustment section 13 also has a reflective spatial light modulator 34 and an imaging optical system 35. The reflective spatial light modulator 34 and the imaging optical system 35 of the adjustment section 13, and the focusing section 14 are arranged on a straight line (second straight line) A2 extending along the Z direction. The reflective spatial light modulator 34 modulates the laser light L1 reflected by the mirror 33. The reflective spatial light modulator 34 is, for example, a spatial light modulator (SLM: Spatial Light Modulator) of a reflective liquid crystal (LCOS: Liquid Crystal on Silicon). The imaging optical system 35 is a bilateral telecentric optical system in which the reflecting surface 34a of the reflective spatial light modulator 34 and the entrance pupil surface 14a of the focusing section 14 are in an imaging relationship. The imaging optical system 35 is composed of three or more lenses.

直線A1及直線A2係位於與Y方向垂直的平面上。直線A1係對直線A2,位於第2壁部22側(一方的壁部側)。在雷射加工頭10A,雷射光L1係從射入部12射入到框體11內後在直線A1上行進,以鏡子33及反射型空間光調變器34依次反射後,在直線A2上行進而從聚光部14射出至框體11外。再者,衰減器31及擴束器32的排列順序亦可相反。又,衰減器31亦可配置於鏡子33與反射型空間光調變器34之間。又,調整部13亦可具有其他的光學零件(例如配置於擴束器32前的轉向鏡等)。Straight line A1 and straight line A2 are located on a plane perpendicular to the Y direction. Straight line A1 is opposite to straight line A2 and is located on the side of the second wall portion 22 (the side of one wall portion). In the laser processing head 10A, the laser light L1 is incident from the incident portion 12 into the frame 11 and then travels on the straight line A1. After being reflected by the mirror 33 and the reflective spatial light modulator 34 in sequence, it travels on the straight line A2 and is emitted from the focusing portion 14 to the outside of the frame 11. Furthermore, the arrangement order of the attenuator 31 and the beam expander 32 may also be reversed. Furthermore, the attenuator 31 may also be arranged between the mirror 33 and the reflective spatial light modulator 34. Furthermore, the adjustment portion 13 may also have other optical components (for example, a turning mirror arranged in front of the beam expander 32).

雷射加工頭10A還具備分光鏡15、測定部16、觀察部17、驅動部18及電路部19。The laser processing head 10A further includes a spectroscope 15 , a measuring unit 16 , an observation unit 17 , a driving unit 18 , and a circuit unit 19 .

分光鏡15係在直線A2上,配置於成像光學系統35與聚光部14之間。亦即,分光鏡15係在框體11內,配置於調整部13與聚光部14之間。分光鏡15係在第4壁部24側,安裝於光學基座29。分光鏡15係使雷射光L1透過。分光鏡15係在抑制散光的觀點,可為例如立方體形,亦可為配置成具有扭曲的關係之2片板型。The spectroscope 15 is disposed on the straight line A2 between the imaging optical system 35 and the focusing section 14. That is, the spectroscope 15 is disposed between the adjustment section 13 and the focusing section 14 in the frame 11. The spectroscope 15 is mounted on the optical base 29 on the side of the fourth wall 24. The spectroscope 15 allows the laser light L1 to pass through. From the viewpoint of suppressing astigmatism, the spectroscope 15 may be, for example, a cubic shape or may be a two-plate type disposed in a twisted relationship.

測定部16係在框體11內,對調整部13配置於第1壁部21側(一方的壁部側相反側)。測定部16係在第4壁部24側,安裝於光學基座29。測定部16係輸出用來測定對象物100的表面(例如雷射光L1射入之側的表面)與聚光部14之距離之測定光L10,經由聚光部14,檢測被對象物100的表面所反射之測定光L10。也就是從測定部16所輸出的測定光L10是經由聚光部14照射至對象物100的表面,被對象物100的表面所反射之測定光L10是經由聚光部14,以測定部16進行檢測。The measuring section 16 is arranged on the first wall 21 side (the side opposite to the wall side) with respect to the adjusting section 13 in the frame 11. The measuring section 16 is mounted on the optical base 29 on the fourth wall 24 side. The measuring section 16 outputs a measuring light L10 for measuring the distance between the surface of the object 100 (for example, the surface on the side where the laser light L1 is incident) and the focusing section 14, and detects the measuring light L10 reflected by the surface of the object 100 through the focusing section 14. That is, the measuring light L10 output from the measuring section 16 is irradiated to the surface of the object 100 through the focusing section 14, and the measuring light L10 reflected by the surface of the object 100 is detected by the measuring section 16 through the focusing section 14.

更具體而言,從測定部16輸出的測定光L10係被在第4壁部24側安裝於光學基座29之光束分離器20及分光鏡15依次反射,再從聚光部14射出至框體11外。被對象物100的表面反射之測定光L10,係從聚光部14射入到框體11內,再以分光鏡15及光束分離器20依次反射,然後射入到測定部16而再以測定部16進行檢測。More specifically, the measurement light L10 output from the measurement section 16 is reflected in sequence by the beam splitter 20 and the spectroscope 15 mounted on the optical base 29 on the side of the fourth wall 24, and then emitted from the focusing section 14 to the outside of the frame 11. The measurement light L10 reflected by the surface of the object 100 is incident from the focusing section 14 into the frame 11, and then reflected in sequence by the spectroscope 15 and the beam splitter 20, and then incident on the measurement section 16 and detected by the measurement section 16.

觀察部17係在框體11內,對調整部13配置於第1壁部21側(一方的壁部側相反側)。觀察部17係在第4壁部24側,安裝於光學基座29。觀察部17係輸出用來觀察對象物100的表面(例如雷射光L1射入之側的表面)之觀察光L20,經由聚光部14,檢測被對象物100的表面所反射之觀察光L20。也就是從觀察部17所輸出的觀察光L20,係經由聚光部14而照射至對象物100的表面,被對象物100的表面反射之觀察光L20係經由聚光部14,以觀察部17進行檢測。The observation section 17 is disposed on the first wall 21 side (the side opposite to the wall side) with respect to the adjustment section 13 in the frame 11. The observation section 17 is mounted on the optical base 29 on the fourth wall 24 side. The observation section 17 outputs the observation light L20 for observing the surface of the object 100 (for example, the surface on the side where the laser light L1 is incident), and detects the observation light L20 reflected by the surface of the object 100 through the focusing section 14. That is, the observation light L20 output from the observation section 17 is irradiated to the surface of the object 100 through the focusing section 14, and the observation light L20 reflected by the surface of the object 100 is detected by the observation section 17 through the focusing section 14.

更具體而言,從觀察部17輸出的觀察光L20係透過光束分離器20而被分光鏡15反射,再從聚光部14射出至框體11外。被對象物100的表面反射之觀察光L20,係從聚光部14射入到框體11內,再以分光鏡15反射,然後透過光束分離器20射入觀察部17而再以觀察部17進行檢測。再者,雷射光L1、測定光L10及觀察光L20各自的波長係互相不同(至少各自的中心波長互相偏移)。More specifically, the observation light L20 output from the observation section 17 passes through the beam splitter 20, is reflected by the spectroscope 15, and is then emitted from the focusing section 14 to the outside of the frame 11. The observation light L20 reflected by the surface of the object 100 enters the frame 11 from the focusing section 14, is reflected by the spectroscope 15, and then passes through the beam splitter 20 to enter the observation section 17 and is detected by the observation section 17. Furthermore, the wavelengths of the laser light L1, the measurement light L10, and the observation light L20 are different from each other (at least the central wavelengths of each are offset from each other).

驅動部18係在第4壁部24側,安裝於光學基座29。安裝於框體11的第6壁部26。驅動部18係藉由例如壓電元件之驅動力,使配置於第6壁部26之聚光部14沿著Z方向移動。The driving unit 18 is mounted on the optical base 29 on the side of the fourth wall 24. It is mounted on the sixth wall 26 of the frame 11. The driving unit 18 moves the focusing unit 14 disposed on the sixth wall 26 along the Z direction by the driving force of a piezoelectric element, for example.

電路部19係在框體11內,對光學基座29配置於第3壁部23側。也就是電路部19係在框體11內,對調整部13、測定部16及觀察部17配置於第3壁部23側。電路部19為例如複數個電路基板。電路部19係處理自測定部16輸出的訊號及輸入至反射型空間光調變器34之訊號。電路部19係依據自測定部16輸出的訊號,控制驅動部18。作為一例,電路部19係依據自測定部16輸出的訊號,控制驅動部18,使對象物100的表面與聚光部14之距離維持成一定(亦即,對象物100的表面與雷射光L1的聚光點之距離維持成一定)。再者,在框體11,設有連接有用來將電路部19電性連接於控制部9(參照圖1)等之配線的連接器(未圖示)。The circuit section 19 is disposed in the frame 11 on the side of the third wall 23 with respect to the optical base 29. That is, the circuit section 19 is disposed in the frame 11 on the side of the third wall 23 with respect to the adjustment section 13, the measuring section 16 and the observation section 17. The circuit section 19 is, for example, a plurality of circuit substrates. The circuit section 19 processes the signal output from the measuring section 16 and the signal input to the reflective spatial light modulator 34. The circuit section 19 controls the driving section 18 based on the signal output from the measuring section 16. As an example, the circuit section 19 controls the driving section 18 based on the signal output from the measuring section 16 so that the distance between the surface of the object 100 and the focusing section 14 is maintained constant (that is, the distance between the surface of the object 100 and the focusing point of the laser light L1 is maintained constant). Furthermore, the housing 11 is provided with a connector (not shown) to which wiring for electrically connecting the circuit section 19 to the control section 9 (see FIG. 1 ) and the like is connected.

雷射加工頭10B係與雷射加工頭10A同樣地,具備框體11、射入部12、調整部13、聚光部14、分光鏡15、測定部16、觀察部17、驅動部18及電路部19。但,雷射加工頭10B的各結構係如圖2所示,對通過1對安裝部65、66間的中心點且與Y方向垂直之虛擬平面,配置成具有與雷射加工頭10A之各結構呈面對稱的關係。The laser processing head 10B is similar to the laser processing head 10A, and includes a housing 11, an incident portion 12, an adjustment portion 13, a focusing portion 14, a spectroscope 15, a measuring portion 16, an observation portion 17, a driving portion 18, and a circuit portion 19. However, the structures of the laser processing head 10B are arranged to have a plane-symmetrical relationship with the structures of the laser processing head 10A with respect to a virtual plane passing through the center point between a pair of mounting portions 65 and 66 and perpendicular to the Y direction, as shown in FIG.

例如,雷射加工頭10A的框體(第1框體)11係以第4壁部24對第3壁部23位於雷射加工頭10B側、且第6壁部26對第5壁部25位於支承部7側的方式,安裝於安裝部65。相對於此,雷射加工頭10B的框體(第2框體)11係以第4壁部24對第3壁部23位於雷射加工頭10A側、且第6壁部26對第5壁部25位於支承部7側的方式,安裝於安裝部66。For example, the frame (first frame) 11 of the laser machining head 10A is mounted on the mounting portion 65 in such a manner that the fourth wall portion 24 is located on the laser machining head 10B side with respect to the third wall portion 23, and the sixth wall portion 26 is located on the support portion 7 side with respect to the fifth wall portion 25. In contrast, the frame (second frame) 11 of the laser machining head 10B is mounted on the mounting portion 66 in such a manner that the fourth wall portion 24 is located on the laser machining head 10A side with respect to the third wall portion 23, and the sixth wall portion 26 is located on the support portion 7 side with respect to the fifth wall portion 25.

雷射加工頭10B的框體11構成為在第3壁部23配置於安裝部66側之狀態下,框體11安裝於安裝部66。具體而言,如以下所述。安裝部66具有座板66a和安裝板66b。座板66a係安裝於設在移動部63的軌道。安裝板66b係立設於座板66a之雷射加工頭10A側的端部。雷射加工頭10B的框體11為在第3壁部23接觸於安裝板66b之狀態下,安裝於安裝部66。雷射加工頭10B的框體11係對安裝部66可進行裝卸。 [作用及效果]The frame 11 of the laser processing head 10B is configured to be mounted on the mounting portion 66 when the third wall portion 23 is arranged on the mounting portion 66 side. Specifically, it is as follows. The mounting portion 66 has a seat plate 66a and a mounting plate 66b. The seat plate 66a is mounted on a rail provided on the moving portion 63. The mounting plate 66b is erected on the end of the seat plate 66a on the laser processing head 10A side. The frame 11 of the laser processing head 10B is mounted on the mounting portion 66 when the third wall portion 23 contacts the mounting plate 66b. The frame 11 of the laser processing head 10B can be loaded and unloaded on the mounting portion 66. [Function and Effect]

在雷射加工頭10A,由於輸出雷射光L1之光源未設在框體11內,故,可謀求框體11的小型化。且,在框體11,第3壁部23與第4壁部24之距離是較第1壁部21與第2壁部22之距離小,配置於第6壁部26之聚光部14在Y方向上朝第4壁部24側偏移。藉此,在沿著與聚光部14的光軸垂直的方向使框體11移動之情況,即使在例如第4壁部24側存在有其他構件(例如雷射加工頭10B),也能夠使聚光部14接近該其他構件。因此,雷射加工頭10A可理想地適用於使聚光部14沿著與其光軸垂直的方向移動。In the laser processing head 10A, since the light source for outputting the laser light L1 is not provided in the frame 11, the frame 11 can be miniaturized. In addition, in the frame 11, the distance between the third wall portion 23 and the fourth wall portion 24 is smaller than the distance between the first wall portion 21 and the second wall portion 22, and the light focusing portion 14 disposed on the sixth wall portion 26 is offset toward the fourth wall portion 24 in the Y direction. Thus, when the frame 11 is moved in a direction perpendicular to the optical axis of the light focusing portion 14, even if there is another component (such as the laser processing head 10B) on the fourth wall portion 24 side, the light focusing portion 14 can be brought close to the other component. Therefore, the laser processing head 10A is ideally suitable for moving the light focusing portion 14 in a direction perpendicular to its optical axis.

又,在雷射加工頭10A,射入部12是設在第5壁部25,在Y方向上朝第4壁部24側偏移。藉此,可在框體11內的區域中之對調整部13較靠近第3壁部23側之區域,配置其他構件(例如電路部19)等,可有效地利用該區域。In the laser processing head 10A, the incident portion 12 is provided on the fifth wall portion 25 and is offset in the Y direction toward the fourth wall portion 24. Thus, other components (such as the circuit portion 19) can be arranged in the region of the region within the frame 11 that is closer to the third wall portion 23 than the adjustment portion 13, and the region can be effectively utilized.

又,在雷射加工頭10A,聚光部14是在X方向上朝第2壁部22側偏移。藉此,在沿著與聚光部14的光軸垂直的方向使框體11移動之情況,即使在例如第2壁部22側存在有其他構件,也能夠使聚光部14接近該其他構件。In the laser processing head 10A, the focusing part 14 is offset in the X direction toward the second wall part 22. Thus, when the frame 11 is moved in a direction perpendicular to the optical axis of the focusing part 14, even if there are other components on the second wall part 22, for example, the focusing part 14 can be brought close to the other components.

又,在雷射加工頭10A,射入部12是設在第5壁部25,在X方向上朝第2壁部22側偏移。藉此,可在框體11內的區域中之對調整部13較靠近第1壁部21側之區域,配置其他構件(例如測定部16及觀察部17)等,可有效地利用該區域。In the laser processing head 10A, the incident portion 12 is provided on the fifth wall portion 25 and is offset in the X direction toward the second wall portion 22. Thus, other components (such as the measuring portion 16 and the observation portion 17) can be arranged in the region of the region within the frame 11 that is closer to the first wall portion 21 than the adjustment portion 13, and the region can be effectively utilized.

又,在雷射加工頭10A,測定部16及觀察部17係在框體11內的區域中,配置於對調整部13靠近第1壁部21側之區域,電路部19係在框體11內的區域中,配置於對調整部13靠近第3壁部23側,分光鏡15係框體11內,配置於調整部13與聚光部14之間。藉此,可有效地利用框體11內的區域。且,在雷射加工裝置1,可依據對象物100的表面與聚光部14之距離的測定結果進行加工。又,在雷射加工裝置1,可依據對象物100的表面之觀察結果進行加工。Furthermore, in the laser processing head 10A, the measuring section 16 and the observation section 17 are arranged in the area inside the frame 11, on the side of the first wall section 21 with respect to the adjusting section 13, the circuit section 19 is arranged in the area inside the frame 11, on the side of the third wall section 23 with respect to the adjusting section 13, and the spectroscope 15 is arranged in the frame 11, between the adjusting section 13 and the focusing section 14. Thus, the area inside the frame 11 can be effectively utilized. Furthermore, in the laser processing device 1, processing can be performed based on the measurement result of the distance between the surface of the object 100 and the focusing section 14. Furthermore, in the laser processing device 1, processing can be performed based on the observation result of the surface of the object 100.

又,在雷射加工頭10A,電路部19係依據自測定部16輸出的訊號,控制驅動部18。藉此,可依據對象物100的表面與聚光部14之距離的測定結果,調整雷射光L1的聚光點之位置。In the laser processing head 10A, the circuit section 19 controls the driving section 18 according to the signal output from the measuring section 16. Thus, the position of the focal point of the laser light L1 can be adjusted according to the measurement result of the distance between the surface of the object 100 and the focusing section 14.

又,在雷射加工頭10A,射入部12、以及調整部13的衰減器31、擴束器32及鏡子33係配置於沿著Z方向延伸之直線A1上,調整部13的反射型空間光調變器34、成像光學系統35及聚光部14、以及聚光部14係配置於沿著Z方向延伸的直線A2上。藉此,能夠緊緻地構成具有衰減器31、擴束器32、反射型空間光調變器34及成像光學系統35之調整部13。In the laser processing head 10A, the incident part 12, the attenuator 31, the beam expander 32 and the mirror 33 of the adjustment part 13 are arranged on the straight line A1 extending along the Z direction, and the reflective spatial light modulator 34, the imaging optical system 35 and the focusing part 14 of the adjustment part 13, and the focusing part 14 are arranged on the straight line A2 extending along the Z direction. In this way, the adjustment part 13 having the attenuator 31, the beam expander 32, the reflective spatial light modulator 34 and the imaging optical system 35 can be compactly configured.

又,在雷射加工頭10A,直線A1係對直線A2,位於第2壁部22側。藉此,可在框體11內的區域中之對調整部13較靠近第1壁部21側之區域,構成使用聚光部14之其他光學系統(例如測定部16及觀察部17)之情況,可使該其他光學系統的結構之自由度提升。In the laser processing head 10A, the straight line A1 is opposite to the straight line A2 and is located on the second wall portion 22 side. Thus, in the region within the frame 11, other optical systems (such as the measuring section 16 and the observing section 17) using the focusing section 14 can be configured in the region closer to the first wall portion 21 than the adjusting section 13, thereby increasing the degree of freedom of the structure of the other optical systems.

以上的作用及效果,藉由雷射加工頭10B也同樣地可以達到。The above functions and effects can also be achieved by the laser processing head 10B.

又,在雷射加工裝置1,雷射加工頭10A的聚光部14係在雷射加工頭10A的框體11朝雷射加工頭10B側偏移,雷射加工頭10B的聚光部14係在雷射加工頭10B的框體11朝雷射加工頭10A側偏移。藉此,使1對雷射加工頭10A、10B分別沿著Y方向移動之情況,能夠使雷射加工頭10A的聚光部14與雷射加工頭10B的聚光部14互相地接近。因此,若依據雷射加工裝置1的話,能夠效率良好地加工對象物100。In the laser processing device 1, the focusing portion 14 of the laser processing head 10A is offset toward the laser processing head 10B side at the frame 11 of the laser processing head 10A, and the focusing portion 14 of the laser processing head 10B is offset toward the laser processing head 10A side at the frame 11 of the laser processing head 10B. Thus, when the pair of laser processing heads 10A and 10B are moved in the Y direction, the focusing portion 14 of the laser processing head 10A and the focusing portion 14 of the laser processing head 10B can be brought close to each other. Therefore, according to the laser processing device 1, the object 100 can be processed efficiently.

又,在雷射加工裝置1,1對安裝部65、66分別可沿著Y方向及Z方向移動。藉此,能夠效率更良好地加工對象物100。Furthermore, in the laser processing device 1, the pair of mounting parts 65 and 66 can be moved in the Y direction and the Z direction, respectively. Thus, the object 100 can be processed more efficiently.

又,在雷射加工裝置1,支承部7係可分別沿著X方向及Y方向移動,以與Z方向平行的軸線作為中心線而進行旋轉。藉此,能夠效率更良好地加工對象物100。 [變形例]Furthermore, in the laser processing device 1, the support portion 7 can be moved in the X direction and the Y direction, respectively, and rotated with an axis parallel to the Z direction as the center line. Thus, the object 100 can be processed more efficiently. [Variation]

例如,如圖6所示,射入部12、調整部13及聚光部14,亦可配置於沿著Z方向延伸的直線A上。藉此,能夠緊緻地構成調整部13。在該情況,調整部13亦可不具有反射型空間光調變器34、和成像光學系統35。又,調整部13亦可具有衰減器31及擴束器32。藉此,能夠緊緻地構成具有衰減器31、擴束器32之調整部13。再者,衰減器31及擴束器32的排列順序亦可相反。For example, as shown in FIG6 , the incident part 12, the adjustment part 13, and the focusing part 14 may be arranged on a straight line A extending along the Z direction. In this way, the adjustment part 13 can be compactly configured. In this case, the adjustment part 13 may not have the reflective spatial light modulator 34 and the imaging optical system 35. In addition, the adjustment part 13 may have the attenuator 31 and the beam expander 32. In this way, the adjustment part 13 having the attenuator 31 and the beam expander 32 can be compactly configured. Furthermore, the arrangement order of the attenuator 31 and the beam expander 32 may be reversed.

又,框體11係構成為第1壁部21、第2壁部22、第3壁部23及第5壁部25中的至少1個配置於雷射加工裝置1的安裝部65(或安裝部66)側之狀態下,框體11安裝於安裝部65(或安裝部66)即可。又,聚光部14係至少在Y方向上朝第4壁部24側偏移即可。藉此,在沿著Y方向使框體11移動之情況,即使在例如第4壁部24側存在有其他構件,也能夠使聚光部14接近該其他構件。又,在沿著Z方向使框體11移動之情況,例如能夠使聚光部14接近對象物100。Furthermore, the frame 11 is configured such that at least one of the first wall portion 21, the second wall portion 22, the third wall portion 23, and the fifth wall portion 25 is arranged on the side of the mounting portion 65 (or the mounting portion 66) of the laser processing device 1, and the frame 11 can be mounted on the mounting portion 65 (or the mounting portion 66). Furthermore, the focusing portion 14 can be offset toward the fourth wall portion 24 at least in the Y direction. Thereby, when the frame 11 is moved along the Y direction, even if there are other components on the side of the fourth wall portion 24, for example, the focusing portion 14 can be brought close to the other components. Furthermore, when the frame 11 is moved along the Z direction, for example, the focusing portion 14 can be brought close to the object 100.

又,亦可為聚光部14係至少在X方向上朝第1壁部21側偏移。藉此,在沿著與聚光部14的光軸垂直的方向使框體11移動之情況,即使在例如第1壁部21側存在有其他構件,也能夠使聚光部14接近該其他構件。在該情況,亦可為射入部12係在X方向上朝第1壁部21側偏移。藉此,可在框體11內的區域中之對調整部13較靠近第2壁部22側之區域,配置其他構件(例如測定部16及觀察部17)等,可有效地利用該區域。Furthermore, the light-collecting portion 14 may be offset toward the first wall portion 21 at least in the X direction. Thus, when the frame 11 is moved in a direction perpendicular to the optical axis of the light-collecting portion 14, even if there are other components on the first wall portion 21 side, for example, the light-collecting portion 14 can be brought close to the other components. In this case, the incident portion 12 may be offset toward the first wall portion 21 side in the X direction. Thus, other components (for example, the measuring portion 16 and the observing portion 17) can be arranged in the region within the frame 11 that is closer to the second wall portion 22 than the adjusting portion 13, and the region can be effectively utilized.

又,亦可為從光源單元8的射出部81a朝雷射加工頭10A的射入部12之雷射光L1的導光、及從光源單元8的射出部82a朝雷射加工頭10B的射入部12之雷射光L2的導光之至少一個是藉由鏡子實施。圖7係為雷射光L1被鏡子導引之雷射加工裝置1的一部分之正面圖。在如圖7所示的結構,用來反射雷射光L1之鏡子3係以在Y方向上與光源單元8的射出部81a相對向且在Z方向上與雷射加工頭10A的射入部12相對向的方式,安裝於移動機構6的移動部63。Furthermore, at least one of the guiding of the laser light L1 from the emitting portion 81a of the light source unit 8 to the incident portion 12 of the laser processing head 10A and the guiding of the laser light L2 from the emitting portion 82a of the light source unit 8 to the incident portion 12 of the laser processing head 10B may be implemented by a mirror. FIG7 is a front view of a portion of the laser processing device 1 in which the laser light L1 is guided by a mirror. In the structure shown in FIG7, the mirror 3 for reflecting the laser light L1 is mounted on the moving portion 63 of the moving mechanism 6 in such a manner as to be opposite to the emitting portion 81a of the light source unit 8 in the Y direction and to be opposite to the incident portion 12 of the laser processing head 10A in the Z direction.

在如圖7所示的結構,即使將移動機構6的移動部63沿著Y方向移動,鏡子3在Y方向上與光源單元8的射出部81a相對向的狀態仍被維持。又,即使將移動機構6的安裝部65沿著Z方向移動,鏡子3在Z方向上與雷射加工頭10A的射入部12相對向的狀態仍被維持。因此,不受雷射加工頭10A的位置影響,能使自光源單元8的射出部81a所射出的雷射光L1確實地射入到雷射加工頭10A的射入部12。並且,亦可利用藉由光纖2之導光極為困難的高輸出長短脈衝雷射等的光源。In the structure shown in FIG. 7 , even if the moving portion 63 of the moving mechanism 6 is moved in the Y direction, the state in which the mirror 3 is opposed to the emission portion 81a of the light source unit 8 in the Y direction is maintained. Furthermore, even if the mounting portion 65 of the moving mechanism 6 is moved in the Z direction, the state in which the mirror 3 is opposed to the injection portion 12 of the laser processing head 10A in the Z direction is maintained. Therefore, the laser light L1 emitted from the emission portion 81a of the light source unit 8 can be reliably injected into the injection portion 12 of the laser processing head 10A without being affected by the position of the laser processing head 10A. In addition, a light source such as a high-output long and short pulse laser, which is extremely difficult to guide through the optical fiber 2, can also be used.

又,在如圖7所示的結構,亦可為鏡子3係以可至少進行角度調整及位置調整中的至少1個調整的方式,安裝於移動機構6的移動部63。藉此,能使自光源單元8的射出部81a所射出的雷射光L1更確實地射入到雷射加工頭10A的射入部12。7, the mirror 3 may be mounted on the moving portion 63 of the moving mechanism 6 in a manner that allows at least one of angle adjustment and position adjustment. This allows the laser light L1 emitted from the emission portion 81a of the light source unit 8 to be more reliably emitted into the injection portion 12 of the laser processing head 10A.

又,光源單元8亦可為具有1個光源者。在該情況,光源單元8係構成為將自1個光源所輸出的雷射光之一部分從射出部81a射出且將該雷射光的殘餘部分從射出部82b射出即可。Furthermore, the light source unit 8 may include one light source. In this case, the light source unit 8 may be configured to emit a portion of the laser light output from one light source from the emission portion 81a and to emit the remaining portion of the laser light from the emission portion 82b.

又,雷射加工裝置1亦可具備1個雷射加工頭10A。即使在具備1個雷射加工頭10A之雷射加工裝置1,在沿著與聚光部14的光軸垂直的Y方向使框體11移動之情況,即使在例如第4壁部24側存在有其他構件,也能夠使聚光部14接近該其他構件。因此,若依據具備1個雷射加工頭10A的雷射加工裝置1的話,也能夠效率良好地加工對象物100。又,在具備1個雷射加工頭10A的雷射加工裝置1,若安裝部65沿著Z方向移動的話,則也能夠效率良好地加工對象物100。又,在具備1個雷射加工頭10A的雷射加工裝置1,若支承部7沿著X方向移動且以與Z方向平行的軸線作為中心線而進行旋轉的話,則能效率更良好地加工對象物100。Furthermore, the laser processing device 1 may also include a laser processing head 10A. Even in the case of a laser processing device 1 including a laser processing head 10A, when the frame 11 is moved in the Y direction perpendicular to the optical axis of the focusing portion 14, even if there are other components on the side of the fourth wall portion 24, for example, the focusing portion 14 can be brought close to the other components. Therefore, according to the laser processing device 1 including a laser processing head 10A, the object 100 can be processed efficiently. Furthermore, in the laser processing device 1 including a laser processing head 10A, when the mounting portion 65 is moved in the Z direction, the object 100 can be processed efficiently. Furthermore, in the laser processing apparatus 1 including one laser processing head 10A, if the support portion 7 moves in the X direction and rotates about an axis parallel to the Z direction as a center line, the object 100 can be processed more efficiently.

又,雷射加工裝置1亦可具備3個以上的雷射加工頭。圖8係具備2對的雷射加工頭之雷射加工裝置1的斜視圖。如圖8所示的雷射加工裝置1,係具備有複數個移動機構200、300、400;支承部7;1對雷射加工頭10A、10B;1對雷射加工頭10C、10D;及光源單元(未圖示)。Furthermore, the laser processing device 1 may also have more than three laser processing heads. FIG8 is a perspective view of the laser processing device 1 having two pairs of laser processing heads. The laser processing device 1 shown in FIG8 has a plurality of moving mechanisms 200, 300, 400; a support portion 7; a pair of laser processing heads 10A, 10B; a pair of laser processing heads 10C, 10D; and a light source unit (not shown).

移動機構200係使支承部7分別沿著X方向、Y方向及Z方向移動,並以與Z方向平行的軸線作為中心線而使支承部7旋轉。The moving mechanism 200 moves the support portion 7 in the X direction, the Y direction, and the Z direction, and rotates the support portion 7 with an axis parallel to the Z direction as a center line.

移動機構300係具有固定部301、及1對安裝部(第1安裝部、第2安裝部)305、306。固定部301係安裝於裝置框架(未圖示)。1對安裝部305、306分別安裝於設在固定部301的軌道,各自獨立而可沿著Y方向移動。The moving mechanism 300 includes a fixed portion 301 and a pair of mounting portions (first mounting portion, second mounting portion) 305, 306. The fixed portion 301 is mounted on a device frame (not shown). The pair of mounting portions 305, 306 are mounted on rails provided on the fixed portion 301, and are independently movable in the Y direction.

移動機構400係具有固定部401、及1對安裝部(第1安裝部、第2安裝部)405、406。固定部401係安裝於裝置框架(未圖示)。1對安裝部405、406分別安裝於設在固定部401的軌道,各自獨立而可沿著X方向移動。再者,固定部401的軌道配置成與固定部301的軌道立體地交叉。The moving mechanism 400 has a fixed part 401 and a pair of mounting parts (first mounting part, second mounting part) 405, 406. The fixed part 401 is mounted on a device frame (not shown). The pair of mounting parts 405, 406 are respectively mounted on rails provided on the fixed part 401, and are independently movable along the X direction. Furthermore, the rails of the fixed part 401 are arranged to intersect with the rails of the fixed part 301 in a three-dimensional manner.

雷射加工頭10A係安裝於移動機構300的安裝部305。雷射加工頭10A係在Z方向上與支承部7相對向的狀態下,對支承於支承部7之對象物100照射雷射光。從雷射加工頭10A所射出的雷射光係藉由光纖2從光源單元(未圖示)進行導引。雷射加工頭10B係安裝於移動機構300的安裝部306。雷射加工頭10B係在Z方向上與支承部7相對向的狀態下,對支承於支承部7之對象物100照射雷射光。從雷射加工頭10B所射出的雷射光係藉由光纖2從光源單元(未圖示)進行導引。The laser processing head 10A is mounted on the mounting portion 305 of the moving mechanism 300. The laser processing head 10A irradiates the object 100 supported by the support portion 7 with laser light in a state where the laser processing head 10A is opposite to the support portion 7 in the Z direction. The laser light emitted from the laser processing head 10A is guided from the light source unit (not shown) by the optical fiber 2. The laser processing head 10B is mounted on the mounting portion 306 of the moving mechanism 300. The laser processing head 10B irradiates the object 100 supported by the support portion 7 with laser light in a state where the laser processing head 10B is opposite to the support portion 7 in the Z direction. The laser light emitted from the laser processing head 10B is guided from the light source unit (not shown) by the optical fiber 2.

雷射加工頭10C係安裝於移動機構400的安裝部405。雷射加工頭10C係在Z方向上與支承部7相對向的狀態下,對支承於支承部7之對象物100照射雷射光。從雷射加工頭10C所射出的雷射光係藉由光纖2從光源單元(未圖示)進行導引。雷射加工頭10D係安裝於移動機構400的安裝部406。雷射加工頭10D係在Z方向上與支承部7相對向的狀態下,對支承於支承部7之對象物100照射雷射光。從雷射加工頭10D所射出的雷射光係藉由光纖2從光源單元(未圖示)進行導引。The laser processing head 10C is mounted on the mounting portion 405 of the moving mechanism 400. The laser processing head 10C irradiates the object 100 supported by the support portion 7 with laser light in a state where the laser processing head 10C is opposite to the support portion 7 in the Z direction. The laser light emitted from the laser processing head 10C is guided from the light source unit (not shown) by the optical fiber 2. The laser processing head 10D is mounted on the mounting portion 406 of the moving mechanism 400. The laser processing head 10D irradiates the object 100 supported by the support portion 7 with laser light in a state where the laser processing head 10D is opposite to the support portion 7 in the Z direction. The laser light emitted from the laser processing head 10D is guided from the light source unit (not shown) by the optical fiber 2.

如圖8所示的雷射加工裝置1之1對雷射加工頭10A、10B的結構係與圖1所示的雷射加工裝置1之1對雷射加工頭10A、10B的結構相同。如圖8所示的雷射加工裝置1之1對雷射加工頭10C、10D的結構,係和將如圖1所示的雷射加工裝置1之1對雷射加工頭10A、10B以與Z方向平行的軸線作為中心線而旋轉90°之情況的1對雷射加工頭10A、10B的結構相同。The structure of the pair of laser processing heads 10A and 10B of the laser processing device 1 shown in Fig. 8 is the same as the structure of the pair of laser processing heads 10A and 10B of the laser processing device 1 shown in Fig. 1. The structure of the pair of laser processing heads 10C and 10D of the laser processing device 1 shown in Fig. 8 is the same as the structure of the pair of laser processing heads 10A and 10B of the laser processing device 1 shown in Fig. 1 rotated 90 degrees with the axis parallel to the Z direction as the center line.

例如,雷射加工頭10C的框體(第1框體)11係以第4壁部24對第3壁部23位於雷射加工頭10D側、且第6壁部26對第5壁部25位於支承部7側的方式,安裝於安裝部65。又,雷射加工頭10C的聚光部14是在Y方向上朝第4壁部24側(亦即,雷射加工頭10D側)偏移。For example, the frame (first frame) 11 of the laser machining head 10C is mounted on the mounting portion 65 in such a manner that the fourth wall portion 24 is located on the laser machining head 10D side relative to the third wall portion 23, and the sixth wall portion 26 is located on the support portion 7 side relative to the fifth wall portion 25. In addition, the focusing portion 14 of the laser machining head 10C is offset in the Y direction toward the fourth wall portion 24 side (that is, the laser machining head 10D side).

雷射加工頭10D的框體(第2框體)11係以第4壁部24對第3壁部23位於雷射加工頭10C側、且第6壁部26對第5壁部25位於支承部7側的方式,安裝於安裝部66。又,雷射加工頭10D的聚光部14是在Y方向上朝第4壁部24側(亦即,雷射加工頭10C側)偏移。The frame (second frame) 11 of the laser machining head 10D is mounted on the mounting portion 66 in such a manner that the fourth wall portion 24 is located on the laser machining head 10C side relative to the third wall portion 23, and the sixth wall portion 26 is located on the support portion 7 side relative to the fifth wall portion 25. In addition, the focusing portion 14 of the laser machining head 10D is offset toward the fourth wall portion 24 side (that is, the laser machining head 10C side) in the Y direction.

如以上所述,在如圖8所示的雷射加工裝置1,使1對雷射加工頭10A、10B分別沿著Y方向移動之情況,能夠使雷射加工頭10A的聚光部14與雷射加工頭10B的聚光部14互相地接近。又,使1對雷射加工頭10C、10D分別沿著X方向移動之情況,能夠使雷射加工頭10C的聚光部14與雷射加工頭10D的聚光部14互相地接近。As described above, in the laser processing device 1 shown in FIG8 , when the pair of laser processing heads 10A and 10B are moved in the Y direction, the focusing portion 14 of the laser processing head 10A and the focusing portion 14 of the laser processing head 10B can be brought close to each other. Also, when the pair of laser processing heads 10C and 10D are moved in the X direction, the focusing portion 14 of the laser processing head 10C and the focusing portion 14 of the laser processing head 10D can be brought close to each other.

又,雷射加工頭及雷射加工裝置,不限於將改質區域形成於對象物100的內部者,亦可為實施其他雷射加工者。Furthermore, the laser processing head and the laser processing device are not limited to those that form the modified region inside the object 100, and may also be those that perform other laser processing.

其次,說明各實施形態。在以下的說明,省略與前述實施形態重複之說明。Next, each embodiment is described. In the following description, descriptions that are repeated with the above-mentioned embodiments are omitted.

[第1實施形態] 如圖9所示的第1實施形態之雷射加工裝置101,係藉由朝對象物100配合聚光點(至少聚光區域之一部分)而照射第1雷射光L1,使得在對象物100形成改質區域。雷射加工裝置101係對對象物100實施修整加工,取得(製造)半導體裝置。雷射加工裝置101係沿著在對象物100的外緣之內側呈環狀延伸的線M3,形成改質區域。雷射加工裝置101係具備載置台107、第1雷射加工頭10A、第1Z軸軌道106A、X軸軌道108、對準用照相機110、以及控制部9。[First embodiment] As shown in FIG. 9, the laser processing device 101 of the first embodiment forms a modified area on the object 100 by irradiating the first laser light L1 toward the object 100 in accordance with the focal point (at least a part of the focal area). The laser processing device 101 performs finishing processing on the object 100 to obtain (manufacture) a semiconductor device. The laser processing device 101 forms the modified area along a line M3 extending in a ring shape inside the outer edge of the object 100. The laser processing device 101 has a mounting table 107, a first laser processing head 10A, a first Z-axis track 106A, an X-axis track 108, an alignment camera 110, and a control unit 9.

修整加工係為在對象物100去除不要部分之加工。修整加工,係包含藉由朝對象物100配合聚光點(至少聚光區域之一部分)而照射第1雷射光L1,使得在對象物100形成改質區域4之雷射加工方法。對象物100係例如包含形成為圓板狀之半導体晶圓。作為對象物未特別限定,可為以各種材料所形成,亦可呈現各種形狀。在對象物100的表面100a形成有功能元件(未圖示)。功能元件為例如發光二極體等的受光元件、雷射二極體等的發光元件、記憶體等的回路元件等。再者,在以下的說明,X方向係對應於前述雷射加工裝置1(參照圖1)的Y方向,Y方向係對應於前述雷射加工裝置1(參照圖1)的X方向。The trimming process is a process for removing unnecessary parts from the object 100. The trimming process includes a laser processing method for forming a modified area 4 on the object 100 by irradiating the first laser light L1 toward the object 100 in accordance with the focal point (at least a part of the focal area). The object 100 includes, for example, a semiconductor wafer formed in the shape of a circular plate. The object is not particularly limited and can be formed of various materials and can also present various shapes. A functional element (not shown) is formed on the surface 100a of the object 100. The functional element is, for example, a light-receiving element such as a light-emitting diode, a light-emitting element such as a laser diode, a circuit element such as a memory, etc. Furthermore, in the following description, the X direction corresponds to the Y direction of the aforementioned laser processing device 1 (refer to Figure 1), and the Y direction corresponds to the X direction of the aforementioned laser processing device 1 (refer to Figure 1).

如圖10(a)及圖10(b)所示,在對象物100,設定有有效區域R及去除區域E。有效區域R係對應於要取得的半導體裝置之部分。在此之有效區域R係從厚度方向觀看對象物100時,包含中央部分之圓板狀的部分。去除區域E係為較對象物100之有效區域R更外側的區域。去除區域E係在對象物100中,有效區域R以外之外緣部分。在此的去除區域E係包為有效區域R的圓環狀之部分。去除區域E係從厚度方向觀看對象物100時,包含周緣部分(外緣的斜角部)。有效區域R及去除區域E的設定係可在控制部9進行。有效區域R及去除區域E亦可為座標指定者。As shown in FIG. 10( a) and FIG. 10( b), an effective area R and a removal area E are set in the object 100. The effective area R is a portion corresponding to the semiconductor device to be obtained. The effective area R here is a disk-shaped portion including the central portion when the object 100 is viewed from the thickness direction. The removal area E is an area further outside the effective area R of the object 100. The removal area E is an outer edge portion outside the effective area R in the object 100. The removal area E here is a ring-shaped portion included in the effective area R. The removal area E includes the peripheral portion (the bevel portion of the outer edge) when the object 100 is viewed from the thickness direction. The setting of the effective area R and the removal area E can be performed in the control unit 9. The effective area R and the removal area E can also be specified by coordinates.

載置台107係為用以載置對象物100之支承部。載置台107係與前述支承部7(參照圖1)同樣地構成。在本實施形態的載置台107,以將對象物100的背面100b設成為雷射光射入面側亦即上側之狀態(將表面100a設成為載置台107側亦即下側之狀態),載置對象物100。載置台107係具有設在其中心的旋轉軸C。旋轉軸C係為沿著Z方向延伸之軸。載置台107係能以旋轉軸C為中心進行旋轉。載置台107係藉由馬達等的習知驅動裝置的驅動力進行旋轉驅動。The mounting table 107 is a support portion for mounting the object 100. The mounting table 107 is constructed in the same manner as the aforementioned support portion 7 (see FIG. 1 ). In the mounting table 107 of the present embodiment, the object 100 is mounted with the back surface 100b of the object 100 being set as the laser light incident side, i.e., the upper side (the surface 100a being set as the mounting table 107 side, i.e., the lower side). The mounting table 107 has a rotation axis C disposed at the center thereof. The rotation axis C is an axis extending along the Z direction. The mounting table 107 can rotate around the rotation axis C. The mounting table 107 is rotationally driven by the driving force of a conventional driving device such as a motor.

第1雷射加工頭10A係對載置於載置台107之對象物100,沿著Z方向照射第1雷射光L1,在該對象物100的內部形成改質區域。第1雷射加工頭10A係安裝於第1Z軸軌道106A及X軸軌道108。第1雷射加工頭10A係藉由馬達等的習知驅動裝置之驅動力,沿著第1Z軸軌道106A,可朝Z方向直線狀移動。第1雷射加工頭10A係藉由馬達等的習知驅動裝置之驅動力,沿著X軸軌道108,可朝X方向直線狀移動。第1雷射加工頭10A係構成照射部。The first laser processing head 10A irradiates the object 100 placed on the mounting table 107 with the first laser light L1 along the Z direction to form a modified area inside the object 100. The first laser processing head 10A is mounted on the first Z-axis track 106A and the X-axis track 108. The first laser processing head 10A can be moved linearly in the Z direction along the first Z-axis track 106A by the driving force of a known driving device such as a motor. The first laser processing head 10A can be moved linearly in the X direction along the X-axis track 108 by the driving force of a known driving device such as a motor. The first laser processing head 10A constitutes an irradiation unit.

第1雷射加工頭10A係如前述般,具備反射型空間光調變器34。反射型空間光調變器34係構成將與第1雷射光L1的光軸垂直之面內的聚光點的形狀(以下亦稱為「光束形狀」)進行成形之成形部。反射型空間光調變器34係以光束形狀具有長度方向的方式,將第1雷射光L1成形。例如,反射型空間光調變器34係藉由使將光束形狀作成為橢圓形之調變圖案顯示於液晶層,使光束形狀成形為橢圓形。As described above, the first laser processing head 10A has a reflective spatial light modulator 34. The reflective spatial light modulator 34 is a shaping unit that shapes the shape of the focal point in a plane perpendicular to the optical axis of the first laser light L1 (hereinafter also referred to as "beam shape"). The reflective spatial light modulator 34 shapes the first laser light L1 in such a way that the beam shape has a longitudinal direction. For example, the reflective spatial light modulator 34 shapes the beam shape into an ellipse by displaying a modulation pattern that makes the beam shape into an ellipse on the liquid crystal layer.

光束形狀不限於橢圓形,為長條形狀即可。光束形狀亦可為扁平圓形狀、長圓形狀或賽道形狀。光束形狀亦可為長條狀之三角形、矩形或多角形。達成這樣的光束形狀之反射型空間光調變器34的調變圖案,亦可包含狹縫圖案及非點圖案中的至少一個。再者,在第1雷射光L1藉由散光等具有複數個聚光點之情況,複數個聚光點中之第1雷射光L1的光路上的最上游側之聚光點的形狀係為本實施形態的光束形狀(在其他雷射光亦相同)。在此的長度方向係為光束形狀之橢圓形的長軸方向,亦被稱為橢圓長軸方向。The shape of the light beam is not limited to an ellipse, and may be a long strip shape. The shape of the light beam may also be a flat circle, an oblong circle, or a racetrack shape. The shape of the light beam may also be a long triangle, rectangle, or polygon. The modulation pattern of the reflective spatial light modulator 34 that achieves such a beam shape may also include at least one of a slit pattern and a non-point pattern. Furthermore, in the case where the first laser light L1 has a plurality of focal points due to astigmatism, etc., the shape of the focal point on the most upstream side of the optical path of the first laser light L1 among the plurality of focal points is the beam shape of this embodiment (the same is true for other laser lights). The length direction here is the long axis direction of the ellipse of the beam shape, also referred to as the long axis direction of the ellipse.

光束形狀係不限於聚光點的形狀,可為聚光點附近的形狀,也就是聚光區域(進行聚光的區域)的一部分之形狀即可。例如,在具有散光之第1雷射光L1的情況,如圖71(a)所示,在聚光點附近之雷射光射入面側的區域,光束形狀71具有長度方向NH。在圖71(a)的光束形狀71之平面內(在聚光點附近之雷射光射入面側的Z方向位置之平面內)的光束強度分佈,形成為在長度方向NH具有較強的強度之分佈,光束強度之較強的方向是與長度方向NH一致。The beam shape is not limited to the shape of the focal point, and may be a shape near the focal point, that is, a shape of a part of the focal area (area where light is focused). For example, in the case of the first laser light L1 with astigmatism, as shown in FIG. 71(a), in the area on the side of the laser light incident surface near the focal point, the beam shape 71 has a longitudinal direction NH. The beam intensity distribution in the plane of the beam shape 71 in FIG. 71(a) (in the plane of the Z-direction position on the side of the laser light incident surface near the focal point) is formed to have a distribution with a stronger intensity in the longitudinal direction NH, and the direction in which the beam intensity is stronger is consistent with the longitudinal direction NH.

在具有散光之第1雷射光L1的情況,如圖71(c)所示,在聚光點附近之雷射光射入面相反面側的區域,光束形狀71具有對雷射光射入面側的區域之長度方向NH(參照圖71(a))呈垂直之長度方向NH0。在圖71(c)的光束形狀71之平面內(在聚光點附近之雷射光射入面的相反面側的Z方向位置之平面內)的光束強度分佈,形成為在長度方向NH0具有較強的強度之分佈,光束強度之較強的方向是與長度方向NH0一致。在具有散光之第1雷射光L1的情況,如圖71(b)所示,在聚光點附近之雷射光射入面側和其相反面側之間的區域,光束形狀71不具有長度方向而是成為圓形。In the case of the first laser light L1 with astigmatism, as shown in FIG71(c), in the area on the opposite side of the laser light incident surface near the focal point, the beam shape 71 has a length direction NH0 that is perpendicular to the length direction NH of the area on the laser light incident surface side (refer to FIG71(a)). The beam intensity distribution in the plane of the beam shape 71 in FIG71(c) (in the plane of the Z direction position on the opposite side of the laser light incident surface near the focal point) is formed to have a distribution with a stronger intensity in the length direction NH0, and the direction in which the beam intensity is stronger is consistent with the length direction NH0. In the case of the first laser light L1 with astigmatism, as shown in FIG. 71( b ), in the region between the laser light incident surface side near the focal point and the opposite surface side, the beam shape 71 does not have a longitudinal direction but becomes a circle.

在具有這種散光之第1雷射光L1的情況,本實施形態作為對象之聚光區域的一部分,係包含聚光點附近之雷射光射入面側的區域,本實施形態作為對象之光束形狀係為如圖71(a)所示的光束形狀71。In the case of the first laser light L1 having such astigmatism, the present embodiment takes the present embodiment as a part of the focusing area as the object, which is the area on the side where the laser light enters the surface near the focal point. The beam shape of the present embodiment as the object is the beam shape 71 as shown in FIG. 71(a).

再者,藉由調整反射型空間光調變器34的調變圖案,能夠將聚光區域之成為如圖71(a)所示的光束形狀71的位置控制於期望的位置。例如,在聚光點附近之雷射光射入面的相反面側的區域,可控制成具有如圖71(a)所示的光束形狀71。又,例如,在聚光點附近之雷射光射入面側與其相反面側之間的區域,可控制成具有如圖71(a)所示的光束形狀71。聚光區域的一部分之位置未特別限定,若為對象物100之從雷射光射入面到其相反面之間的任一位置即可。Furthermore, by adjusting the modulation pattern of the reflective spatial light modulator 34, the position of the focusing area to form the beam shape 71 as shown in FIG. 71(a) can be controlled to a desired position. For example, the area on the opposite side of the laser light incident surface near the focal point can be controlled to have the beam shape 71 as shown in FIG. 71(a). Also, for example, the area between the laser light incident surface side and the opposite side thereof near the focal point can be controlled to have the beam shape 71 as shown in FIG. 71(a). The position of a part of the focusing area is not particularly limited, and any position between the laser light incident surface and the opposite side of the object 100 can be used.

又,例如,使用藉由調變圖案的控制及/或機械式機構之狹縫或橢圓光學系統的情況,如圖72(a)所示,在聚光點附近之雷射光射入面側的區域,光束形狀71具有長度方向NH。在圖72(a)的光束形狀71之平面內(在聚光點附近之雷射光射入面側的Z方向位置之平面內)的光束強度分佈,形成為在長度方向NH具有較強的強度之分佈,光束強度之較強的方向是與長度方向NH一致。For example, in the case of using a slit or elliptical optical system controlled by a modulation pattern and/or a mechanical mechanism, as shown in FIG72(a), in the area on the laser light incident surface near the focal point, the beam shape 71 has a longitudinal direction NH. The beam intensity distribution in the plane of the beam shape 71 in FIG72(a) (in the plane of the Z-direction position on the laser light incident surface near the focal point) is formed to have a distribution with a stronger intensity in the longitudinal direction NH, and the direction of the stronger beam intensity is consistent with the longitudinal direction NH.

在使用狹縫或橢圓光學系統的情況,如圖72(c)所示,在聚光點附近之雷射光射入面相反面側的區域,光束形狀71具有對雷射光射入面側的區域之長度方向NH(參照圖71(a))相同的長度方向NH。在圖72(c)的光束形狀71之平面內(在聚光點附近之雷射光射入面相反面側的Z方向位置之平面內)的光束強度分佈,形成為在長度方向NH具有較強的強度之分佈,光束強度之較強的方向是與長度方向NH一致。在使用狹縫或橢圓光學系統的情況,如圖72(b)所示,在聚光點,光束形狀71具有對雷射光射入面側的區域之長度方向NH(參照圖72(a))呈垂直的長度方向NH0。在圖72(b)的光束形狀71之平面內(在聚光點的Z方向位置之平面內)的光束強度分佈,形成為在長度方向NH0具有較強的強度之分佈,光束強度之較強的方向是與長度方向NH0一致。In the case of using a slit or elliptical optical system, as shown in FIG72(c), in the area on the opposite side of the laser light incident surface near the focal point, the beam shape 71 has the same length direction NH as the length direction NH of the area on the laser light incident surface side (refer to FIG71(a)). The beam intensity distribution in the plane of the beam shape 71 in FIG72(c) (in the plane of the Z direction position on the opposite side of the laser light incident surface near the focal point) is formed to have a distribution with a stronger intensity in the length direction NH, and the direction of the stronger beam intensity is consistent with the length direction NH. In the case of using a slit or elliptical optical system, as shown in FIG72(b), at the focal point, the beam shape 71 has a longitudinal direction NH0 that is perpendicular to the longitudinal direction NH of the area on the laser light incident side (see FIG72(a)). The beam intensity distribution in the plane of the beam shape 71 in FIG72(b) (in the plane of the Z direction position of the focal point) is formed to have a distribution with a stronger intensity in the longitudinal direction NH0, and the direction of the stronger beam intensity is consistent with the longitudinal direction NH0.

在使用這種狹縫或橢圓光學系統的情況,聚光點以外的光束形狀71成為具有長度方向之形狀,聚光點以外的光束形狀71係為本實施形態作為對象之光束形狀。亦即,本實施形態作為對象之聚光區域的一部分,係包含聚光點附近之雷射光射入面側的區域,本實施形態作為對象之光束形狀係為如圖72(a)所示的光束形狀71。When such a slit or elliptical optical system is used, the beam shape 71 outside the focal point becomes a shape having a longitudinal direction, and the beam shape 71 outside the focal point is the beam shape targeted by this embodiment. That is, a part of the focal area targeted by this embodiment includes the area on the side of the laser light incident surface near the focal point, and the beam shape targeted by this embodiment is the beam shape 71 shown in FIG. 72(a).

第1雷射加工頭10A具備距離測量感測器36。距離測量感測器36係對對象物100之雷射光射入面射出距離測量用雷射光,再檢測被該雷射光射入面所反射之距離測量用的光,藉此取得對象物100的雷射光射入面之位移資料。再者,作為距離測量感測器36,為與第1雷射光L1不同軸的感測器之情況,能夠使用三角距離測量方式、雷射共焦點方式、白色共焦點方式、光譜干擾方式、散光方式等的感測器。再者,作為距離測量感測器36,為與第1雷射光L1同軸的感測器之情況,能夠使用散光方式等的感測器。第1雷射加工頭10A的電路部19(參照圖3)係依據在距離測量感測器36所取得的位移資料,驅動驅動部18(參照圖5),使聚光部14追隨雷射光射入面。藉此,依據該位移資料,使聚光部14沿著Z方向移動,將對象物100的雷射光射入面與第1雷射光L1的聚光點亦即第1聚光點之距離維持成一定。關於這樣的距離測量感測器36及其控制(以下亦稱為「追隨控制」),在其他雷射加工頭也相同。The first laser processing head 10A is provided with a distance measuring sensor 36. The distance measuring sensor 36 emits a distance measuring laser light to the laser light incident surface of the object 100, and detects the distance measuring light reflected by the laser light incident surface, thereby obtaining displacement data of the laser light incident surface of the object 100. Furthermore, when the distance measuring sensor 36 is a sensor that is not coaxial with the first laser light L1, a sensor of a triangular distance measuring method, a laser confocal point method, a white confocal point method, a spectral interference method, an astigmatism method, etc. can be used. Furthermore, when the distance measuring sensor 36 is a sensor that is coaxial with the first laser light L1, a sensor of an astigmatism method, etc. can be used. The circuit section 19 (see FIG. 3 ) of the first laser processing head 10A drives the driving section 18 (see FIG. 5 ) based on the displacement data obtained from the distance measuring sensor 36, so that the focusing section 14 follows the laser light incident surface. In this way, the focusing section 14 is moved along the Z direction based on the displacement data, and the distance between the laser light incident surface of the object 100 and the focusing point of the first laser light L1, i.e., the first focusing point, is maintained constant. Such a distance measuring sensor 36 and its control (hereinafter also referred to as "following control") are the same in other laser processing heads.

第1Z軸軌道106A為沿著Z方向延伸的軌道。第1Z軸軌道106A係經由安裝部65而安裝於第1雷射加工頭10A。第1Z軸軌道106A係第1雷射加工頭10A沿著Z方向移動,讓第1雷射光L1的第1聚光點沿著Z方向移動。第1Z軸軌道106A係對應於前述移動機構6(參照圖1)或前述移動機構300(參照圖8)的軌道。第1Z軸軌道106A係構成垂直移動機構。The first Z-axis track 106A is a track extending along the Z direction. The first Z-axis track 106A is mounted on the first laser processing head 10A via the mounting portion 65. The first Z-axis track 106A is a track for the first laser processing head 10A to move along the Z direction, so that the first focal point of the first laser light L1 moves along the Z direction. The first Z-axis track 106A corresponds to the track of the aforementioned moving mechanism 6 (refer to FIG. 1 ) or the aforementioned moving mechanism 300 (refer to FIG. 8 ). The first Z-axis track 106A constitutes a vertical moving mechanism.

X軸軌道108為沿著X方向延伸的軌道。X軸軌道108係分別安裝於第1及第2Z軸軌道106A、106B。X軸軌道108係第1雷射加工頭10A沿著X方向移動,讓第1雷射光L1的第1聚光點沿著X方向移動。X軸軌道108係使第1雷射加工頭10A移動,讓第1聚光點通過旋轉軸C或其附近。X軸軌道108係對應於前述移動機構6(參照圖1)或前述移動機構300(參照圖8)的軌道。X軸軌道108係構成水平移動機構。The X-axis track 108 is a track extending along the X direction. The X-axis track 108 is mounted on the first and second Z-axis tracks 106A and 106B, respectively. The X-axis track 108 moves the first laser processing head 10A along the X direction, so that the first focal point of the first laser light L1 moves along the X direction. The X-axis track 108 moves the first laser processing head 10A so that the first focal point passes through the rotation axis C or its vicinity. The X-axis track 108 is a track corresponding to the aforementioned moving mechanism 6 (refer to FIG. 1 ) or the aforementioned moving mechanism 300 (refer to FIG. 8 ). The X-axis track 108 constitutes a horizontal moving mechanism.

對準用照相機110係用來取得使用於各種調整的圖像之照相機。對準用照相機110係對對象物100進行攝像。對準用照相機110係設在安裝有第1雷射加工頭10A之安裝部65,可與第1雷射加工頭10A同步移動。The alignment camera 110 is a camera for obtaining images used for various adjustments. The alignment camera 110 takes an image of the object 100. The alignment camera 110 is provided in the mounting portion 65 where the first laser processing head 10A is mounted, and can move synchronously with the first laser processing head 10A.

控制部9係作為包含處理器、記憶體、儲存器及通信裝置等之電腦裝置構成。在控制部9,加載於記憶體等的軟體(程式)是藉由處理器執行,記憶體及儲存器之資料的讀取及寫入以及藉由通訊裝置之通訊是藉由處理器控制。藉此,控制部9能夠達到各種功能。The control unit 9 is constituted as a computer device including a processor, a memory, a storage, and a communication device. In the control unit 9, the software (program) loaded on the memory, etc. is executed by the processor, and the reading and writing of data in the memory and the storage and the communication through the communication device are controlled by the processor. In this way, the control unit 9 can achieve various functions.

控制部9係控制載置台107及第1雷射加工頭10A。控制部9係控制載置台107的旋轉、來自於第1雷射加工頭10A的第1雷射光L1的照射、光束形狀及第1聚光點的移動。控制部9係依據關於載置台107的旋轉量之旋轉資訊(以下亦稱為「θ資訊」),可執行各種的控制。θ資訊可從使載置台107旋轉的驅動裝置之驅動量取得,亦可藉由其他的感測器等取得。θ資訊係可藉由習知的各種方法取得。在此的θ資訊係包含以對象物100位於0°方向的位置時的狀態作為基準之旋轉角度。The control unit 9 controls the stage 107 and the first laser processing head 10A. The control unit 9 controls the rotation of the stage 107, the irradiation of the first laser light L1 from the first laser processing head 10A, the beam shape, and the movement of the first focal point. The control unit 9 can perform various controls based on the rotation information about the rotation amount of the stage 107 (hereinafter also referred to as "θ information"). The θ information can be obtained from the driving amount of the driving device that rotates the stage 107, and can also be obtained by other sensors. The θ information can be obtained by various known methods. The θ information here includes the rotation angle based on the state when the object 100 is located at the 0° direction.

控制部9係在一邊使載置台107旋轉,一邊使第1聚光點位於對象物100之沿著線M3(有效區域R的周緣)之位置的狀態,依據θ資訊控制第1雷射加工頭10A之第1雷射光L1的照射開始及停止,執行沿著有效區域R的周緣形成改質區域的周緣處理。The control unit 9 rotates the mounting table 107 while positioning the first focal point along the line M3 (the periphery of the effective area R) of the object 100, controls the start and stop of irradiation of the first laser light L1 of the first laser processing head 10A according to the θ information, and performs peripheral processing to form a modified area along the periphery of the effective area R.

控制部9係藉由不使載置台107旋轉,對去除區域E照射第1雷射光L1,並且使該第1雷射光L1的第1聚光點移動,執行在去除區域E形成改質區域之去除處理。The control unit 9 performs a removal process for forming a modified region in the removal region E by irradiating the removal region E with the first laser light L1 and moving the first focal point of the first laser light L1 without rotating the stage 107 .

控制部9係控制載置台107的旋轉、來自於第1雷射加工頭10A之第1雷射光L1的照射以及第1聚光點的移動中的至少一個動作,使得改質區域所含有的複數個改質點之間距(與加工行進方向鄰接的改質點的間隔)成為一定。The control unit 9 controls at least one of the rotation of the mounting table 107, the irradiation of the first laser light L1 from the first laser processing head 10A, and the movement of the first focal point, so that the distance between the multiple modified points contained in the modified area (the distance between the modified points adjacent to the processing direction) becomes constant.

控制部9係從對準用照相機110的攝像圖像,取得對象物100的旋轉方向之基準位置(0°方向的位置)及對象物100的直徑。控制部9係控制第1雷射加工頭10A的移動,使第1雷射加工頭10A能夠沿著X軸軌道108移動直到載置台107的旋轉軸C上。The control unit 9 obtains the reference position (position in the 0° direction) of the rotation direction of the object 100 and the diameter of the object 100 from the image captured by the alignment camera 110. The control unit 9 controls the movement of the first laser processing head 10A so that the first laser processing head 10A can move along the X-axis track 108 until it reaches the rotation axis C of the mounting table 107.

其次,以下說明關於使用雷射加工裝置101,對對象物100實施修整加工,取得(製造)半導體裝置的方法之一例。Next, an example of a method for performing trimming processing on the object 100 using the laser processing device 101 to obtain (manufacture) a semiconductor device will be described below.

首先,在將背面100b作成為雷射光射入面側之狀態下,將對象物100載置於載置台107上。在對象物100,搭載有功能元件的表面100a側係黏著有支承基板或帶構件而被保護著。First, the object 100 is placed on the mounting table 107 with the back surface 100b being the laser light incident side. The surface 100a of the object 100 on which the functional element is mounted is adhered to a supporting substrate or a tape member for protection.

接著,實施修整加工。在修整加工,藉由控制部9執行周緣處理。具體而言,如圖11(a)所示,在一邊使載置台107以一定的旋轉速度進行旋轉,一邊使第1聚光點(聚光點)P1位於對象物100之沿著有效區域R的周緣之位置的狀態,依據θ資訊控制第1雷射加工頭10A之第1雷射光L1的照射開始及停止。藉此,如圖11(b)及圖11(c)所示,沿著線M3(有效區域R的周緣)形成改質區域4。所形成的改質區域4係包含改質點及從改質點延伸的龜裂。Next, the trimming process is performed. In the trimming process, the peripheral processing is performed by the control unit 9. Specifically, as shown in FIG11(a), while the stage 107 is rotated at a certain rotation speed, the first focal point (focal point) P1 is located at the position of the object 100 along the periphery of the effective area R, and the irradiation start and stop of the first laser light L1 of the first laser processing head 10A are controlled according to the θ information. Thereby, as shown in FIG11(b) and FIG11(c), a modified area 4 is formed along the line M3 (the periphery of the effective area R). The formed modified area 4 includes a modified point and a crack extending from the modified point.

在修整加工,藉由控制部9執行去除處理。具體而言,如圖12(a)所示,不使載置台107旋轉,而在去除區域E照射第1雷射光L1,並且使第1雷射加工頭10A沿著X軸軌道108朝互相分離的方向移動,使該第1雷射光L1的第1聚光點P1朝自對象物100的中心分離之方向移動。使載置台107旋轉90°後,在去除區域E照射第1雷射光L1,並且使第1雷射加工頭10A沿著X軸軌道108朝互相分離的方向移動,使該第1雷射光L1的第1聚光點P1朝自對象物100的中心分離之方向移動。In the trimming process, the control unit 9 performs the removal process. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12( a), the first laser light L1 is irradiated to the removal area E without rotating the stage 107, and the first laser processing head 10A is moved in the direction of separation from each other along the X-axis track 108, so that the first focal point P1 of the first laser light L1 moves in the direction of separation from the center of the object 100. After the stage 107 is rotated 90°, the first laser light L1 is irradiated to the removal area E, and the first laser processing head 10A is moved in the direction of separation from each other along the X-axis track 108, so that the first focal point P1 of the first laser light L1 moves in the direction of separation from the center of the object 100.

藉此,如圖12(b)所示,沿著當從Z方向觀看時將去除區域E分成4等份的方式延伸之線,形成改質區域4。所形成的改質區域4係包含改質點及從改質點延伸的龜裂。此龜裂可到達表面100a及背面100b中的至少一個,亦可不到達表面100a及背面100b中的至少一個。然後,如圖13(a)及圖13(b)所示,例如藉由治具或空氣,以改質區域4作為邊界而將去除區域E去除。Thus, as shown in FIG. 12( b ), a modified region 4 is formed along a line extending in a manner that divides the removal region E into four equal parts when viewed from the Z direction. The formed modified region 4 includes a modified point and a crack extending from the modified point. The crack may reach at least one of the surface 100a and the back surface 100b, or may not reach at least one of the surface 100a and the back surface 100b. Then, as shown in FIG. 13( a ) and FIG. 13( b ), the removal region E is removed, for example, by a jig or air, with the modified region 4 as a boundary.

接著,如圖13(c)所示,對對象物100的剝離面100h,進行精磨或藉由磨石等的研磨材KM之研磨。在藉由蝕刻將對象物100剝離之情況,亦可將該研磨簡單化。進行以上的結果,取得半導體裝置100K。Next, as shown in FIG. 13( c ), the peeled surface 100h of the object 100 is finely ground or polished with a grinding material KM such as a grindstone. In the case where the object 100 is peeled off by etching, the polishing can also be simplified. As a result of the above, a semiconductor device 100K is obtained.

其次,更詳細地說明關於本實施形態之修整加工。Next, the finishing process of this embodiment will be described in more detail.

如圖14所示,對象物100係呈板狀,作為其主面,具有表面100a及背面100b(參照圖10)。對象物100係以(100)面作為主面之晶圓。對象物100係為以矽形成之矽晶圓。對象物100具有:與一方的(110)面垂直之第1結晶方位K1;及與另一方的(110)面垂直之第2結晶方位K2。(110)面係為解理面。第1結晶方位K1及第2結晶方位K2係為解理方向,亦即,在對象物100中龜裂最容易延伸之方向。第1結晶方位K1與第2結晶方位K2係互相正交。As shown in FIG14 , the object 100 is in the shape of a plate, and has a surface 100a and a back surface 100b as its main surface (refer to FIG10 ). The object 100 is a wafer having the (100) surface as the main surface. The object 100 is a silicon wafer formed of silicon. The object 100 has: a first crystal orientation K1 perpendicular to the (110) surface on one side; and a second crystal orientation K2 perpendicular to the (110) surface on the other side. The (110) surface is a cleavage plane. The first crystal orientation K1 and the second crystal orientation K2 are cleavage directions, that is, directions in which turtle cracks are most likely to extend in the object 100. The first crystal orientation K1 and the second crystal orientation K2 are orthogonal to each other.

在對象物100,設有對準對象100n。例如,對準對象100n係對對象物100的0°方向之位置,在θ方向(繞著載置台107之旋轉軸C的旋轉方向)具有一定的關係。0°方向之位置係指在θ方向上成為基準之對象物100的位置。例如對準對象100n為形成於外緣部之切痕。再者,對準對象100n未特別限定,可為對象物100之定向平面,亦可為功能元件的圖案。在圖示例,對準對象100n係設在對象物100的0°方向之位置。換言之,對準對象100n係設在對象物100之朝第2結晶方位K2的方向延伸的直徑上之位置。An alignment object 100n is provided on the object 100. For example, the alignment object 100n is a position in the 0° direction of the object 100, and has a certain relationship in the θ direction (the rotation direction around the rotation axis C of the mounting table 107). The position in the 0° direction refers to the position of the object 100 that serves as a reference in the θ direction. For example, the alignment object 100n is a cut formed on the outer edge. Furthermore, the alignment object 100n is not particularly limited, and may be an orientation plane of the object 100, or may be a pattern of a functional element. In the illustrated example, the alignment object 100n is provided at a position in the 0° direction of the object 100. In other words, the alignment object 100n is provided at a position on a diameter of the object 100 extending in the direction of the second crystal orientation K2.

在對象物100,設定有作為修整預定線之線M3。線M3係為預定進行改質區域4的形成之線。線M3係在對象物100的外緣內側,呈環狀延伸。在此的線M3係呈圓環狀延伸。線M3係設定於對象物100的有效區域R與去除區域E之邊界。線M3的設定係可在控制部9進行。線M3係為假想的線,但亦可為實際上劃出的線。線M3亦可為座標指定者。In the object 100, a line M3 is set as a predetermined trimming line. The line M3 is a line for forming a predetermined modified area 4. The line M3 extends in a ring shape inside the outer edge of the object 100. The line M3 here extends in a circular ring shape. The line M3 is set at the boundary between the effective area R and the removal area E of the object 100. The setting of the line M3 can be performed in the control unit 9. The line M3 is a virtual line, but it can also be a line actually drawn. The line M3 can also be specified by coordinates.

如圖9所示,雷射加工裝置101之控制部9係具有取得部9a、決定部9b、加工控制部9c、及調整部9d。取得部9a係取得關於對象物100之對象物資訊。對象物資訊係例如包含關於對象物100的結晶方位(第1結晶方位K1及第2結晶方位K2)之資訊情報;和關於對象物100的0°方向之位置及對象物100的直徑之對準資訊。取得部9a係能夠依據對準用照相機110的攝像圖像、及藉由使用者的操作或來自外部的通訊等之輸入,取得對象物資訊。As shown in FIG9 , the control unit 9 of the laser processing device 101 includes an acquisition unit 9a, a determination unit 9b, a processing control unit 9c, and an adjustment unit 9d. The acquisition unit 9a acquires object information about the object 100. The object information includes, for example, information about the crystal orientation (the first crystal orientation K1 and the second crystal orientation K2) of the object 100; and alignment information about the position of the object 100 in the 0° direction and the diameter of the object 100. The acquisition unit 9a can acquire the object information based on the image captured by the alignment camera 110 and inputs such as user operation or external communication.

取得部9a係取得關於線M3之線資訊。線資訊係包含線M3的資訊、及關於沿著線M3使第1聚光點P1相對地移動之情況的該移動之移動方向(亦稱為「加工行進方向」)之資訊。例如,加工行進方向係為通過位於線M3上之第1聚光點P1的線M3之接線方向。取得部9a係依據藉由使用者的操作或來自外部的通訊等之輸入,取得線資訊。The acquisition unit 9a acquires line information about the line M3. The line information includes information about the line M3 and information about the moving direction (also referred to as "processing direction") of the first focal point P1 when the first focal point P1 is relatively moved along the line M3. For example, the processing direction is the connecting direction of the line M3 passing through the first focal point P1 located on the line M3. The acquisition unit 9a acquires the line information based on input such as user operation or external communication.

決定部9b係依據藉由取得部9a所取得的對象物資訊及線資訊,決定沿著線M3使第1聚光點P1相對地移動的情況之長度方向的方位,讓光束形狀的長度方向與加工行進方向交叉。具體而言,決定部9b係依據對象物資訊及線資訊,將長度方向NH的方位決定成第1方位及第2方位。第1方位係沿著線M3的第1區域M31使第1聚光點P1相對地移動的情況之光束形狀的長度方向的方位。第2方位係沿著線M3的第2區域M32使第1聚光點P1相對地移動的情況之光束形狀的長度方向的方位。以下,將「光束形狀的長度方向的方位」僅稱為「光束形狀的方位」。The determining unit 9b determines the orientation in the length direction of the case where the first light-converging point P1 is relatively moved along the line M3 based on the object information and line information acquired by the acquiring unit 9a, so that the length direction of the light beam shape intersects with the processing direction. Specifically, the determining unit 9b determines the orientation of the length direction NH into a first orientation and a second orientation based on the object information and line information. The first orientation is the orientation in the length direction of the light beam shape when the first light-converging point P1 is relatively moved along the first area M31 of the line M3. The second orientation is the orientation in the length direction of the light beam shape when the first light-converging point P1 is relatively moved along the second area M32 of the line M3. Hereinafter, the "orientation in the length direction of the light beam shape" will be referred to simply as the "orientation of the light beam shape."

第1區域M31係在將線M3與對象物100的第2結晶方位K2正交的1點作為0°的點之情況,包含從0°的點到45°的點之前為止之間的部分、從90°的點到135°的點之前為止之間的部分、從180°的點到225°的點之前為止之間的部分、及從270°的點到315°的點之前為止之間的部分。第2區域M32係在將線M3與對象物100的第2結晶方位K2正交的1點作為0°的點之情況,包含從45°的點到90°的點之前為止之間的部分、從135°的點到180°的點之前為止之間的部分、從225°的點到270°的點之前為止之間的部分、及從315°的點到360°的點之前為止之間的部分。以下的說明中,關於這樣的線M3上之各點的角度之定義相同。The first region M31 is a case where a point at which the line M3 is orthogonal to the second crystal orientation K2 of the object 100 is taken as the 0° point, and includes the portion from the 0° point to the 45° point, the portion from the 90° point to the 135° point, the portion from the 180° point to the 225° point, and the portion from the 270° point to the 315° point. The second region M32 includes a portion from a point at 45° to a point at 90°, a portion from a point at 135° to a point at 180°, a portion from a point at 225° to a point at 270°, and a portion from a point at 315° to a point at 360°, when the line M3 and the second crystal orientation K2 of the object 100 are perpendicular to each other at 0°. In the following description, the definition of the angle of each point on the line M3 is the same.

第1區域M31係在沿著線M3使第1聚光點P1相對地移動的情況,包含後述的加工角度為0°以上未滿45°、或-90°以上未滿-45°之區域。第2區域M32係在沿著線M3使第1聚光點P1相對地移動的情況,包含後述的加工角度為45°以上未滿90°、或-45°以上未滿0°之區域。順便一提,線M3之第1區域M31及第2區域M32分別對應於後述的第4實施形態之第1部分。The first area M31 is a case where the first focal point P1 is relatively moved along the line M3, and includes an area where the processing angle described later is 0° to less than 45°, or -90° to less than -45°. The second area M32 is a case where the first focal point P1 is relatively moved along the line M3, and includes an area where the processing angle described later is 45° to less than 90°, or -45° to less than 0°. Incidentally, the first area M31 and the second area M32 of the line M3 correspond to the first part of the fourth embodiment described later.

如圖15(b)所示,加工角度α係加工行進方向BD對第1結晶方位K1之角度。加工角度α係從作為雷射光射入面之背面100b觀看時,將朝逆時鐘方向的角度設為正(+)的角度、朝向順時鐘方向的角度設為負(-)的角度。加工角度α係可依據載置台107的θ資訊、對象物資訊及線資訊取得。在沿著第1區域M31使第1聚光點P1相對地移動的情況,可視為為加工角度α為0°以上未滿45°、或-90°以上未滿-45°的情況。在沿著第2區域M32使第1聚光點P1相對地移動的情況,可視為加工角度α為45°以上未滿90°、或 -45°以上未滿0°的情況。As shown in FIG. 15( b ), the processing angle α is the angle of the processing direction BD to the first crystal orientation K1. When viewed from the back surface 100 b as the laser light incident surface, the angle in the counterclockwise direction is set as a positive (+) angle, and the angle in the clockwise direction is set as a negative (-) angle. The processing angle α can be obtained based on the θ information, object information, and line information of the mounting table 107. When the first focal point P1 is relatively moved along the first area M31, it can be regarded as a case where the processing angle α is greater than 0° and less than 45°, or greater than -90° and less than -45°. When the first focal point P1 is relatively moved along the second area M32, the processing angle α can be regarded as being greater than 45° and less than 90°, or greater than -45° and less than 0°.

第1方位及第2方位,係以第1結晶方位K1及第2結晶方位K2中之與加工行進方向BD之間的角度較大的一方(更遠離的一方)接近的方式,對加工行進方向BD傾斜之方向的方位。The first orientation and the second orientation are orientations inclined with respect to the processing direction BD in such a manner that the first crystal orientation K1 and the second crystal orientation K2, whichever has a larger angle with respect to the processing direction BD (the one farther away), approaches the first crystal orientation K1 and the second crystal orientation K2.

第1方位及第2方位在加工角度α為0°以上未滿90°之情況,如下述所示。第1方位係為朝接近第2結晶方位K2側,長度方向NH對加工行進方向BD傾斜之方向的方位。第2方位係為朝接近第1結晶方位K1側,長度方向NH對加工行進方向BD傾斜之方向的方位。第1方位係為朝從加工行進方向BD接近第2結晶方位K2側,傾斜10°~35°之方向的方位。第2方位係為朝從加工行進方向BD接近第1結晶方位K1側,傾斜10°~35°之方向的方位。The first orientation and the second orientation are as follows when the processing angle α is greater than 0° and less than 90°. The first orientation is an orientation in a direction in which the length direction NH is inclined to the processing direction BD, toward the side close to the second crystal orientation K2. The second orientation is an orientation in a direction in which the length direction NH is inclined to the processing direction BD, toward the side close to the first crystal orientation K1. The first orientation is an orientation in a direction in which the length direction NH is inclined to the processing direction BD by 10° to 35° toward the side close to the second crystal orientation K2 from the processing direction BD. The second orientation is an orientation in a direction in which the length direction NH is inclined to the processing direction BD by 10° to 35°.

第1方位係光束角度β為+10°~+35°的情況之光束形狀71的方位。第2方位係光束角度β為-35°~-10°的情況之光束形狀71的方位。光束角度β係加工行進方向BD與長度方向NH之間的角度。光束角度β係從作為雷射光射入面之背面100b觀看時,將朝逆時鐘方向的角度設為正(+)的角度、朝向順時鐘方向的角度設為負(-)的角度。光束角度β係可依據光束形狀71的方位與加工行進方向BD所取得。The first orientation is the orientation of the beam shape 71 when the beam angle β is +10° to +35°. The second orientation is the orientation of the beam shape 71 when the beam angle β is -35° to -10°. The beam angle β is the angle between the processing direction BD and the longitudinal direction NH. The beam angle β is the angle in the counterclockwise direction as a positive (+) angle and the angle in the clockwise direction as a negative (-) angle when viewed from the back surface 100b as the laser light incident surface. The beam angle β can be obtained according to the orientation of the beam shape 71 and the processing direction BD.

加工控制部9c係控制對對象物100之雷射加工的開始及停止。加工控制部9c係執行第1處理,該第1處理為沿著線M3的第1區域M31使第1聚光點P1相對地移動而形成改質區域4,並且使在線M3的第1區域M31以外的區域之改質區域4的形成停止。加工控制部9c係執行第2處理,該第2處理為沿著線M3的第2區域M32使第1聚光點P1相對地移動而形成改質區域4,並且使在線M3的第2區域M32以外的區域之改質區域4的形成停止。The processing control unit 9c controls the start and stop of the laser processing of the object 100. The processing control unit 9c performs a first process, which is to relatively move the first focal point P1 along the first area M31 of the line M3 to form the modified area 4, and to stop the formation of the modified area 4 in the area other than the first area M31 of the line M3. The processing control unit 9c performs a second process, which is to relatively move the first focal point P1 along the second area M32 of the line M3 to form the modified area 4, and to stop the formation of the modified area 4 in the area other than the second area M32 of the line M3.

藉由加工控制部9c之改質區域4的形成及其停止的切換係能以下述的方式達成。例如,在第1雷射加工頭10A,藉由切換第1雷射光L1的照射(輸出)的開始及停止(ON/OFF),能夠切換改質區域4的形成與該形成的停止。具體而言,在雷射振盪器是以固體雷射器所構成之情況,利用切換設在共振器內的Q開關(AOM(音響光學調變器)、EOM(電氣光學調變器)等)之ON/OFF,高速地切換第1雷射光L1的照射之開始及停止。在雷射振盪器是以光纖雷射器所構成之情況,利用切換晶種雷射、構成放大器(激發用)雷射器之半導體雷射器的輸出之ON/OFF,高速地切換第1雷射光L1的照射之開始及停止。在雷射振盪器是使用外部調變元件之情況,利用切換設在共振器外的外部調變元件(AOM、EOM等)之ON/OFF,高速地切換第1雷射光L1的照射之ON/OFF。The switching of the formation and stop of the modified region 4 by the processing control unit 9c can be achieved in the following manner. For example, in the first laser processing head 10A, by switching the start and stop (ON/OFF) of the irradiation (output) of the first laser light L1, the formation of the modified region 4 and the stop of the formation can be switched. Specifically, in the case where the laser oscillator is composed of a solid laser, by switching the ON/OFF of a Q switch (AOM (acoustic optical modulator), EOM (electro-optical modulator) etc.) provided in the resonator, the start and stop of the irradiation of the first laser light L1 can be switched at a high speed. When the laser oscillator is composed of an optical fiber laser, the output of the semiconductor laser constituting the amplifier (excitation) laser is switched on/off to switch the start and stop of the irradiation of the first laser light L1 at high speed. When the laser oscillator uses an external modulation element, the irradiation of the first laser light L1 is switched on/off at high speed by switching on/off the external modulation element (AOM, EOM, etc.) provided outside the resonator.

或者,藉由加工控制部9c之改質區域4的形成及其停止的切換,亦可由下述的方式達成。例如,亦可藉由控制擋門等的機械式機構,開閉第1雷射光L1的光路,切換改質區域4的形成與該形成的停止。亦可藉由將第1雷射光L1切換成CW光(連續波),使改質區域4的形成停止。亦可藉由在反射型空間光調變器34的液晶層,顯示作成為無法將第1雷射光L1的聚光狀態改質之狀態的圖案(例如,使雷射光散射之緞紋(satin pattern)的圖案),使改質區域4的形成停止。亦可藉由控制衰減器等的輸出調整部而使第1雷射光L1的輸出降低成無法形成改質區域,使改質區域4的形成停止。亦可藉由切換偏振光方向,使改質區域4的形成停止。亦可藉由將第1雷射光L1朝光軸以外的方向散射(飛散)而切斷,使改質區域4的形成停止。Alternatively, the switching of the formation and the stopping of the modified area 4 by the process control unit 9c can also be achieved in the following manner. For example, the formation of the modified area 4 and the stopping of the formation can be switched by controlling a mechanical mechanism such as a shutter to open and close the optical path of the first laser light L1. The formation of the modified area 4 can also be stopped by switching the first laser light L1 to CW light (continuous wave). The formation of the modified area 4 can also be stopped by displaying a pattern that is made to be in a state that cannot modify the focusing state of the first laser light L1 (for example, a satin pattern that scatters laser light) on the liquid crystal layer of the reflective spatial light modulator 34. The formation of the modified area 4 can also be stopped by controlling an output adjustment unit such as an attenuator to reduce the output of the first laser light L1 to a state where the modified area cannot be formed. The formation of the modified region 4 may be stopped by switching the polarization direction. The formation of the modified region 4 may be stopped by scattering (scattering) the first laser light L1 in directions other than the optical axis to cut it off.

調整部9d係藉由控制反射型空間光調變器34,調整光束形狀71之方位。調整部9d係在藉由加工控制部9c執行第1處理的情況,調整光束形狀71的方位,用以形成第1方位。調整部9d係在藉由加工控制部9c執行第2處理的情況,調整光束形狀71的方位,用以形成第2方位。調整部9d係調整光束形狀71的長度方向NH,使得對加工行進方向BD在±35°的範圍內產生變化。The adjusting unit 9d adjusts the orientation of the beam shape 71 by controlling the reflective spatial light modulator 34. When the process control unit 9c performs the first process, the adjusting unit 9d adjusts the orientation of the beam shape 71 to form the first orientation. When the process control unit 9c performs the second process, the adjusting unit 9d adjusts the orientation of the beam shape 71 to form the second orientation. The adjusting unit 9d adjusts the longitudinal direction NH of the beam shape 71 so that the longitudinal direction NH of the beam shape 71 changes within the range of ±35° with respect to the process travel direction BD.

在前述雷射加工裝置101,實施以下所述的修整加工(雷射加工方法)。In the laser processing apparatus 101, the trimming process (laser processing method) described below is performed.

在修整加工,首先,使載置台107旋轉成對準用照相機110位於對象物100的對準對象100n的正上方並且使對準用照相機110的焦點對焦於對準對象100n,且使搭載有對準用照相機110之第1雷射加工頭10A沿著X軸軌道108及第1Z軸軌道106A移動。In the trimming process, first, the mounting table 107 is rotated so that the alignment camera 110 is located directly above the alignment target 100n of the object 100 and the focus of the alignment camera 110 is focused on the alignment target 100n, and the first laser processing head 10A equipped with the alignment camera 110 is moved along the X-axis track 108 and the first Z-axis track 106A.

藉由對準用照相機110進行攝像。依據對準用照相機110的攝像圖像,取得對象物100之0°方向的位置。藉由取得部9a,依據對準用照相機110的攝像圖像、及藉由使用者的操作或來自外部的通訊等之輸入,取得對象物資訊及線資訊(資訊取得製程)。對象物資訊包含關於對象物100之0°方向的位置及直徑的對準資訊。如前述般,由於對準對象100n對0°方向的位置,在θ方向具有一定的關係,故,藉由從攝像圖像取得對準對象100n的位置,能夠取得0°方向的位置。依據對準用照相機110的攝像圖像,取得對象物100之直徑。再者,對象物100的直徑,亦可藉由來自於使用者的輸入來設定。The image is taken by the alignment camera 110. The position of the object 100 in the 0° direction is acquired based on the image captured by the alignment camera 110. The acquisition unit 9a acquires object information and line information (information acquisition process) based on the image captured by the alignment camera 110 and inputs such as user operation or external communication. The object information includes alignment information about the position and diameter of the object 100 in the 0° direction. As described above, since the position of the alignment object 100n in the 0° direction has a certain relationship in the θ direction, the position of the alignment object 100n in the 0° direction can be acquired by acquiring the position of the alignment object 100n from the captured image. The diameter of the object 100 is acquired based on the image captured by the alignment camera 110. Furthermore, the diameter of the object 100 may also be set by input from the user.

依據所取得的對象物資訊及線資訊,藉由決定部9b,決定第1方位及第2方位,作為沿著線M3使第1聚光點P1相對地移動的情況的光束形狀71之長度方向NH的方位(決定製程)。Based on the acquired object information and line information, the determining unit 9b determines the first orientation and the second orientation as the orientation in the longitudinal direction NH of the beam shape 71 when the first focal point P1 is relatively moved along the line M3 (determination process).

接著,使載置台107旋轉,讓對象物100位於0°方向的位置。在X方向上,使第1雷射加工頭10A沿著X軸軌道108及第1Z軸軌道106A移動,讓第1聚光點P1位於修整預定位置。例如修整預定位置係對象物100之線M3上的預定位置。Next, the stage 107 is rotated so that the object 100 is located at the 0° direction. In the X direction, the first laser processing head 10A is moved along the X-axis track 108 and the first Z-axis track 106A so that the first focal point P1 is located at the predetermined trimming position. For example, the predetermined trimming position is a predetermined position on the line M3 of the object 100.

然後,使載置台107開始旋轉。開始進行藉由距離測量感測器之背面100b的追隨。再者,在距離測量感測器的追隨開始前,預先確認第1聚光點P1的位置為距離測量感測器的可測長範圍內。在載置台107的旋轉速度成為一定(等速)的時間點,開始進行藉由第1雷射加工頭10A之第1雷射光L1的照射。Then, the stage 107 is made to rotate. The tracking by the back side 100b of the distance measuring sensor is started. Furthermore, before the tracking by the distance measuring sensor is started, it is confirmed in advance that the position of the first focal point P1 is within the measurable range of the distance measuring sensor. When the rotation speed of the stage 107 becomes constant (constant speed), the irradiation of the first laser light L1 by the first laser processing head 10A is started.

藉由一邊使載置台107旋轉,一邊藉由加工控制部9c切換第1雷射光L1的照射之ON/OFF,如圖15(a)所示,在線M3中,沿著第1區域M31使第1聚光點P1相對地移動而形成改質區域4,並且使在線M3的第1區域M31以外的區域之改質區域4的形成停止(第1加工製程)。如圖15(b)所示,在執行第1加工製程之情況,藉由調整部9d,調整光束形狀71的方位,用以形成第1方位。也就是第1加工製程之光束形狀71的方位係被固定在第1方位。By rotating the stage 107 and switching the irradiation of the first laser light L1 by the process control unit 9c on/off, as shown in FIG. 15(a), the first focal point P1 is relatively moved along the first area M31 on the line M3 to form the modified area 4, and the formation of the modified area 4 in the area other than the first area M31 on the line M3 is stopped (first process). As shown in FIG. 15(b), when the first process is executed, the orientation of the beam shape 71 is adjusted by the adjustment unit 9d to form the first orientation. That is, the orientation of the beam shape 71 in the first process is fixed at the first orientation.

然後,藉由一邊使載置台107旋轉,一邊藉由加工控制部9c切換第1雷射光L1的照射之ON/OFF,如圖16(a)所示,在線M3中,沿著第2區域M32使第1聚光點P1相對地移動而形成改質區域4,並且使在線M3的第1區域M31以外的區域之改質區域4的形成停止(第2加工製程)。如圖16(b)所示,在執行第2加工製程之情況,藉由調整部9d,調整光束形狀71的方位,用以形成第2方位。也就是第2加工製程之光束形狀71的方位係被固定在第2方位。Then, by rotating the stage 107 and switching the irradiation of the first laser light L1 by the process control unit 9c on/off, as shown in FIG. 16(a), the first focal point P1 is relatively moved along the second area M32 on the line M3 to form the modified area 4, and the formation of the modified area 4 in the area other than the first area M31 on the line M3 is stopped (second process). As shown in FIG. 16(b), when executing the second process, the orientation of the beam shape 71 is adjusted by the adjustment unit 9d to form the second orientation. That is, the orientation of the beam shape 71 in the second process is fixed at the second orientation.

改變修整預定位置之Z方向位置,反覆進行前述第1加工製程及第2加工製程。藉由以上方式,在對象物100的內部,沿著有效區域R的周緣之線M3,於Z方向上形成複數列的改質區域4。The Z-direction position of the predetermined trimming position is changed, and the first processing step and the second processing step are repeated. In the above manner, a plurality of rows of modified regions 4 are formed in the Z-direction along the line M3 of the periphery of the effective region R inside the object 100.

以上,在本實施形態的雷射加工裝置101,執行第1處理,該第1處理為沿著線M3的第1區域M31使第1聚光點P1相對地移動而形成改質區域4,並且使在線M3的第1區域M31以外的區域之改質區域4的形成停止。在第1處理,光束形狀71的長度方向NH的方位被調整成為與加工行進方向BD交叉的方位,亦即依據對象物資訊及線資訊所決定之第1方位。又,執行第2處理,該第2處理為沿著線M3的第2區域M32使第1聚光點P1相對地移動而形成改質區域4,並且使在線M3的第2區域M32以外的區域之改質區域4的形成停止。在第2處理,光束形狀71的長度方向NH的方位被調整成為與加工行進方向BD交叉的方位,亦即依據對象物資訊及線資訊所決定之第2方位。因此,僅在長度方向NH與加工行進方向BD一致的狀態下,沿著線M3,使第1聚光點P1相對地移動,使得在例如因對象物100的物性引起第1區域M31及第2區域M32的修整面之品質降低這種情況,也能抑制這種修整面的品質降低。因此,在雷射加工裝置101,可抑制去除了外緣部分亦即去除區域E之對象物100的修整面的品質會依據部位不同而降低的情事。As described above, in the laser processing device 101 of the present embodiment, the first processing is performed, and the first processing is to relatively move the first focal point P1 along the first area M31 of the line M3 to form the modified area 4, and to stop the formation of the modified area 4 in the area other than the first area M31 of the line M3. In the first processing, the orientation of the longitudinal direction NH of the beam shape 71 is adjusted to an orientation intersecting with the processing travel direction BD, that is, the first orientation determined based on the object information and the line information. In addition, the second processing is performed, and the second processing is to relatively move the first focal point P1 along the second area M32 of the line M3 to form the modified area 4, and to stop the formation of the modified area 4 in the area other than the second area M32 of the line M3. In the second processing, the orientation of the longitudinal direction NH of the beam shape 71 is adjusted to an orientation intersecting with the processing direction BD, that is, a second orientation determined based on the object information and the line information. Therefore, only when the longitudinal direction NH is consistent with the processing direction BD, the first focal point P1 is relatively moved along the line M3, so that even if the quality of the trimmed surface of the first area M31 and the second area M32 is reduced due to the physical properties of the object 100, the reduction in the quality of the trimmed surface can be suppressed. Therefore, in the laser processing device 101, it is possible to suppress the situation in which the quality of the trimmed surface of the object 100 from which the outer edge portion, that is, the area E, is removed is reduced depending on the location.

在藉由本實施形態的雷射加工裝置101之雷射加工方法,實施第1加工製程,該第1加工製程為沿著線M3的第1區域M31使第1聚光點P1相對地移動而形成改質區域4,並且使在線M3的第1區域M31以外的區域之改質區域4的形成停止。在第1加工製程,長度方向NH的方位被調整成為與加工行進方向BD交叉的方位,亦即依據對象物資訊及線資訊所決定之第1方位。又,實施第2加工製程,該第2加工製程為沿著線M3的第2區域M32使第1聚光點P1相對地移動而形成改質區域4,並且使在線M3的第2區域M32以外的區域之改質區域4的形成停止。在第2加工製程,長度方向NH的方位被調整成為與加工行進方向BD交叉的方位,亦即依據對象物資訊及線資訊所決定之第2方位。因此,僅在光束形狀71的長度方向NH與加工行進方向BD一致的狀態下,沿著線M3,使第1聚光點P1相對地移動,使得在例如因對象物100的物性引起第1區域M31及第2區域M32的修整面之品質降低這種情況,也能抑制這種修整面的品質降低。因此,在藉由雷射加工裝置101之雷射加工方法,可抑制去除了外緣部分亦即去除區域E之對象物100的修整面的品質會依據部位不同而降低的情事。In the laser processing method using the laser processing device 101 of the present embodiment, a first processing process is implemented, wherein the first focal point P1 is relatively moved along the first area M31 of the line M3 to form a modified area 4, and the formation of the modified area 4 in the area outside the first area M31 of the line M3 is stopped. In the first processing process, the orientation of the longitudinal direction NH is adjusted to an orientation intersecting with the processing travel direction BD, that is, a first orientation determined based on object information and line information. In addition, a second processing process is implemented, wherein the first focal point P1 is relatively moved along the second area M32 of the line M3 to form a modified area 4, and the formation of the modified area 4 in the area outside the second area M32 of the line M3 is stopped. In the second processing step, the orientation of the longitudinal direction NH is adjusted to an orientation intersecting with the processing direction BD, that is, the second orientation determined based on the object information and the line information. Therefore, only when the longitudinal direction NH of the beam shape 71 is consistent with the processing direction BD, the first focal point P1 is relatively moved along the line M3, so that even if the quality of the trimmed surface of the first area M31 and the second area M32 is reduced due to the physical properties of the object 100, the quality reduction of the trimmed surface can be suppressed. Therefore, in the laser processing method using the laser processing device 101, it is possible to suppress the situation in which the quality of the trimmed surface of the object 100 from which the outer edge portion, that is, the area E, is removed is reduced depending on the location.

特別是在本實施形態,於第1處理(第1加工製程),光束形狀71的方位被固定在第1方位,同樣地在第2處理(第2加工製程),光束形狀71方位被固定在第2方位。分別在第1處理及第2處理(第1加工製程及第2加工製程),光束形狀71不會變動而是形成為一定,因此,能夠達到穩定的雷射加工。In particular, in the present embodiment, the orientation of the beam shape 71 is fixed at the first orientation in the first process (first processing step), and similarly, the orientation of the beam shape 71 is fixed at the second orientation in the second process (second processing step). In the first process and the second process (first processing step and second processing step), the beam shape 71 does not change but is formed to be constant, so that stable laser processing can be achieved.

又,依據形成改質區域4的部位,會有自改質區域4延伸的龜裂受到容易解理的結晶方位的影響,變得不易朝加工行進方向BD伸展或修整面的品質惡化之虞。關於這一點,在雷射加工裝置101,對象物資訊係包含關於對象物100的結晶方位(第1結晶方位K1及第2結晶方位K2)之資訊。線資訊係包含關於加工行進方向BD之資訊。藉此,即使在對象物100具有結晶方位之情況,亦可抑制對象物100的修整面的品質依據部位不同而降低的情事。Furthermore, depending on the location where the modified region 4 is formed, there is a risk that the tortoise crack extending from the modified region 4 is affected by the crystal orientation that is easily cleaved, and becomes difficult to extend in the processing direction BD or the quality of the trimmed surface may deteriorate. In this regard, in the laser processing device 101, the object information includes information about the crystal orientation (the first crystal orientation K1 and the second crystal orientation K2) of the object 100. The line information includes information about the processing direction BD. Thereby, even if the object 100 has a crystal orientation, it is possible to suppress the quality of the trimmed surface of the object 100 from being reduced depending on the location.

在本實施形態的雷射加工裝置101,包含作為成形部之反射型空間光調變器34,調整部9d藉由控制反射型空間光調變器34,調整長度方向NH的方位。藉此,可確實地調整長度方向NH的方位。The laser processing device 101 of the present embodiment includes the reflective spatial light modulator 34 as a shaping unit, and the adjusting unit 9d adjusts the orientation in the longitudinal direction NH by controlling the reflective spatial light modulator 34. Thus, the orientation in the longitudinal direction NH can be adjusted reliably.

在本實施形態的雷射加工裝置101,對象物100係為以(100)面作為主面,且具有與一方的(110)面垂直之第1結晶方位K1、及與另一方的(110)面垂直之第2結晶方位K2之晶圓。線M3係從與對象物100的主面垂直的方向觀看的情況,呈圓環狀延伸。第1區域M31係在沿著線M3使第1聚光點P1相對地移動的情況,包含加工角度α為0°以上未滿45°之區域。第2區域M32係在沿著線M3使第1聚光點P1相對地移動的情況,包含加工角度α為45°以上未滿90°之區域。藉此,即使在對象物100為以(100)面作為主面的晶圓之情況,亦可抑制對象物100的修整面的品質依據部位不同而降低的情事。In the laser processing device 101 of the present embodiment, the object 100 is a wafer having a (100) plane as a main surface, a first crystal orientation K1 perpendicular to the (110) plane on one side, and a second crystal orientation K2 perpendicular to the (110) plane on the other side. The line M3 extends in a circular ring shape when viewed from a direction perpendicular to the main surface of the object 100. The first area M31 is a region where the processing angle α is greater than 0° and less than 45° when the first focal point P1 is relatively moved along the line M3. The second area M32 is a region where the processing angle α is greater than 45° and less than 90° when the first focal point P1 is relatively moved along the line M3. Thus, even when the object 100 is a wafer having a (100) plane as a main surface, it is possible to suppress the quality of the trimmed surface of the object 100 from being degraded depending on the location.

在本實施形態的雷射加工裝置101,第1方位及第2方位,係以第1結晶方位K1及第2結晶方位K2中之與加工行進方向BD之間的角度較大的一方接近的方式,對加工行進方向BD傾斜之方向的方位。藉此,即使在對象物100為以(100)面作為主面的晶圓之情況,亦可更確實地抑制在第1區域M31及第2區域M32中,對象物100的修整面的品質降低的情事。In the laser processing device 101 of the present embodiment, the first orientation and the second orientation are orientations in a direction inclined with respect to the processing direction BD in such a manner that the first crystal orientation K1 and the second crystal orientation K2 are close to the one with a larger angle with respect to the processing direction BD. Thus, even when the object 100 is a wafer with a (100) plane as a main surface, it is possible to more reliably suppress the degradation of the quality of the trimmed surface of the object 100 in the first region M31 and the second region M32.

例如在第1結晶方位K1拉引龜裂之情況,因將光束形狀71的方位作成為加工行進方向BD的方位,所以,傾斜成對加工行進方向BD接近第1結晶方位K1側相反側之第2結晶方位K2。藉此,如圖15(b)所示,對藉由結晶方位(結晶軸)之龜裂伸展力W1,作用成藉由將光束形狀71作成長條狀之龜裂伸展力W2抵銷,能夠使得龜裂精度良好地沿著加工行進方向BD延伸。For example, in the case of pulling the tortoise crack in the first crystal orientation K1, since the orientation of the beam shape 71 is made the orientation of the processing direction BD, the second crystal orientation K2 is tilted to the processing direction BD, which is opposite to the first crystal orientation K1. As shown in FIG. 15(b), the tortoise crack extension force W1 by the crystal orientation (crystal axis) is offset by the tortoise crack extension force W2 by making the beam shape 71 into a long strip, so that the tortoise crack can be extended along the processing direction BD with good accuracy.

例如在第2結晶方位K2拉引龜裂之情況,因將光束形狀71的方位作成為加工行進方向BD的方位,所以,傾斜成對加工行進方向BD接近第2結晶方位K2側相反側之第1結晶方位K1。藉此,如圖16(b)所示,對藉由結晶方位之龜裂伸展力W1,作用成藉由將光束形狀71作成長條狀之龜裂伸展力W2抵銷,能夠使得龜裂精度良好地沿著加工行進方向BD延伸。For example, in the case of pulling the tortoise crack in the second crystal orientation K2, since the orientation of the beam shape 71 is made the orientation of the processing direction BD, the first crystal orientation K1 is tilted to the opposite side of the processing direction BD close to the second crystal orientation K2. As shown in FIG. 16(b), the tortoise crack extension force W1 due to the crystal orientation is offset by the tortoise crack extension force W2 due to making the beam shape 71 into a long strip, so that the tortoise crack can be extended along the processing direction BD with good accuracy.

在本實施形態的雷射加工裝置101,第1方位,係朝第1結晶方位K1及第2結晶方位K2中之與加工行進方向BD之間的角度較大的一方接近之側,從加工行進方向BD傾斜10°~35°之方向的方位。第2方位,係朝第1結晶方位K1及第2結晶方位K2中之與加工行進方向BD之間的角度較大的一方接近之側,從加工行進方向BD傾斜10°~35°之方向的方位。藉此,即使在對象物100為以(100)面作為主面的晶圓之情況,亦可更確實地抑制在第1區域M31及第2區域M32中,對象物100的修整面的品質降低的情事。In the laser processing device 101 of the present embodiment, the first orientation is an orientation in a direction inclined by 10° to 35° from the processing direction BD, on the side close to the first crystal orientation K1 and the second crystal orientation K2, which have a larger angle with the processing direction BD. The second orientation is an orientation in a direction inclined by 10° to 35° from the processing direction BD, on the side close to the first crystal orientation K1 and the second crystal orientation K2, which have a larger angle with the processing direction BD. Thus, even when the object 100 is a wafer having a (100) plane as a main surface, it is possible to more reliably suppress the degradation of the quality of the trimmed surface of the object 100 in the first region M31 and the second region M32.

本實施形態的雷射加工裝置101及藉由雷射加工裝置101之雷射加工方法,在線M3的第1部分(第1區域M31或第2區域M32),在光束形狀71的長度方向NH與加工行進方向BD交叉之狀態下,沿著線M3使第1聚光點P1相對地移動。藉此,例如,僅在長度方向NH與加工行進方向BD一致的狀態下,沿著線M3,使第1聚光點P1相對地移動,使得在因對象物100的物性引起在線M3的第1部分之修整面的品質降低這種情況,也能抑制這種修整面的品質降低。能夠修整面的品質會依據部位不同而降低的情事。The laser processing device 101 of the present embodiment and the laser processing method using the laser processing device 101 relatively move the first focal point P1 along the line M3 in a state where the longitudinal direction NH of the beam shape 71 intersects with the processing direction BD in the first part (the first area M31 or the second area M32) of the line M3. Thus, for example, only in a state where the longitudinal direction NH and the processing direction BD coincide with each other, the first focal point P1 is relatively moved along the line M3, so that even if the quality of the trimmed surface of the first part of the line M3 is degraded due to the physical properties of the object 100, the deterioration of the quality of the trimmed surface can be suppressed. It is possible to reduce the deterioration of the quality of the trimmed surface depending on the part.

圖17係顯示以圖9的雷射加工裝置101執行雷射加工的情況之具體的第1運用例的時間圖表。圖17中的追蹤加工,係指藉由距離測量感測器36,對對象物100之雷射光射入面射出距離測量用雷射光,再檢測被該雷射光射入面所反射之距離測量用的光,取得雷射光射入面之位移資料的處理。圖17中的追隨控制係藉由距離測量感測器36之前述控制。追隨控制的記錄係指取得該位移資料的控制,追隨控制的再生係指依據該位移資料,驅動驅動部18(參照圖5)使聚光部14追隨雷射光射入面的控制。「Z方向的加工位置」係聚光部14(參照圖5)的聚光位置(焦點)。「雷射光的照射」係第1雷射光L1的照射。FIG17 is a time chart showing a specific first operation example in which laser processing is performed by the laser processing device 101 of FIG9. The tracking processing in FIG17 refers to the process of emitting distance measuring laser light to the laser light incident surface of the object 100 by the distance measuring sensor 36, and then detecting the distance measuring light reflected by the laser light incident surface to obtain the displacement data of the laser light incident surface. The tracking control in FIG17 is the aforementioned control by the distance measuring sensor 36. The recording of the tracking control refers to the control of obtaining the displacement data, and the reproduction of the tracking control refers to the control of driving the driving unit 18 (refer to FIG5) based on the displacement data so that the focusing unit 14 follows the laser light incident surface. The "processing position in the Z direction" refers to the focusing position (focal point) of the focusing unit 14 (see FIG. 5). The "irradiation of laser light" refers to the irradiation of the first laser light L1.

在圖17中的雷射加工,使於Z方向呈7列之改質區域4形成於對象物100的內部。7列的改質區域4係從距離雷射光射入面最遠的位置依序稱為「SD1」、「SD2」、「SD3」、「SD4」、「SD5」、「SD6」及「SD7」(以下相同)。在SD1~SD3形成時,朝第1方位及第2方位調整光束形狀71的方位,在SD4~SD7形成時,使光束形狀71的長度方向NH與加工行進方向BD一致。In the laser processing in FIG. 17 , 7 rows of modified regions 4 are formed in the Z direction inside the object 100. The 7 rows of modified regions 4 are sequentially referred to as "SD1", "SD2", "SD3", "SD4", "SD5", "SD6" and "SD7" (hereinafter the same) from the position farthest from the laser light incident surface. When SD1 to SD3 are formed, the orientation of the beam shape 71 is adjusted toward the first orientation and the second orientation, and when SD4 to SD7 are formed, the longitudinal direction NH of the beam shape 71 is made consistent with the processing advancing direction BD.

在圖17,依據時間T1~T10的順序,時間前進。圖17所示的各種處理係在校準、對準及高度設定結束後再實施。校準係各種測量值的校正處理。對準係各種零件的調整處理。高度設定係對雷射光射入面進行攝像,以投影的網線圖案之反襯成為最大的方式使載置台107朝Z方向相對移動,將此時的雷射光射入面之Z方向位置作為焦點位置(位移為0μm)之處理。各種處理的時間點係依據例如載置台107的θ資訊及旋轉速度等。針對關於圖17之以上的各點,在圖18~圖20也相同。In FIG. 17 , time advances in the order of time T1 to T10. The various processes shown in FIG. 17 are implemented after calibration, alignment, and height setting are completed. Calibration is the correction process of various measured values. Alignment is the adjustment process of various parts. Height setting is to photograph the laser light incident surface, move the mounting table 107 relatively in the Z direction in a manner that the reflection of the projected mesh pattern is maximized, and use the Z direction position of the laser light incident surface at this time as the focal position (displacement is 0 μm). The timing of various processes is based on, for example, the θ information and rotation speed of the mounting table 107. The same is true for the above points in FIG. 17 in FIG. 18 to FIG. 20 .

在雷射加工裝置101,以圖17的時間圖表所示的順序,能夠執行各種處理。在圖17的例子,載置台107未朝θ方向(繞著旋轉軸C的旋轉方向)的一方向連續旋轉,而是朝θ方向的一方向與另一方向旋轉。In the laser processing device 101, various processes can be performed in the order shown in the time chart of Fig. 17. In the example of Fig. 17, the mounting table 107 does not rotate continuously in one direction of the θ direction (rotation direction around the rotation axis C), but rotates in one direction and the other direction of the θ direction.

具體而言,在雷射加工裝置101,如圖17所示,直到時間T1為止,實施追蹤加工。在到時間T1為止,將載置台107朝一方向的旋轉方向加速。將Z方向的加工位置作為雷射光射入面,停止追隨控制。將光束形狀71方位切換成第1方位。停止第1雷射光L1的照射。在時間T2,持續實施追蹤加工。在時間T2,使載置台107朝一方向等速旋轉,藉由追隨控制,取得雷射光射入面的位移資料。除此以外的時間T2的處理內容是與時間T1的處理內容相同。Specifically, in the laser processing device 101, as shown in FIG. 17 , tracking processing is performed until time T1. Until time T1, the stage 107 is accelerated in a rotational direction in one direction. The processing position in the Z direction is used as the laser light incident surface, and tracking control is stopped. The orientation of the beam shape 71 is switched to the first orientation. The irradiation of the first laser light L1 is stopped. At time T2, tracking processing is continued. At time T2, the stage 107 is rotated at a constant speed in one direction, and displacement data of the laser light incident surface is obtained by tracking control. The processing content of time T2 is the same as that of time T1.

在時間T3,持續實施追蹤加工。在時間T3,使載置台107的一方向的旋轉減速,讓Z方向的加工位置朝SD1形成時的加工位置移動,停止追隨控制。除此以外的時間T3的處理內容是與時間T2的處理內容相同。在時間T4,實施SD1形成之雷射加工(SD1加工)。在時間T4,將載置台107朝另一方向的旋轉方向加速。除此以外的時間T4的處理內容是與時間T3的處理內容相同。At time T3, tracking processing is continued. At time T3, the rotation of the stage 107 in one direction is decelerated, and the processing position in the Z direction is moved toward the processing position when SD1 is formed, and the tracking control is stopped. The processing content of time T3 is the same as the processing content of time T2. At time T4, laser processing (SD1 processing) for SD1 formation is performed. At time T4, the rotation direction of the stage 107 in the other direction is accelerated. The processing content of time T4 is the same as the processing content of time T3.

在時間T5,持續實施SD1加工。在時間T5,使載置台107朝另一方向進行等速旋轉,驅動驅動部18(參照圖5),藉由追隨控制,讓聚光部14追隨雷射光射入面。在時間T5,Z方向的加工位置係為SD1形成時之加工位置,光束形狀71的方位為第1方位。沿著線M3的第1區域M31,照射(ON)第1雷射光L1並移動第1聚光點P1,形成改質區域4。另外,沿著線M3的第2區域M32,未照射(OFF)第1雷射光L1,停止改質區域4的形成。At time T5, SD1 processing is continued. At time T5, the stage 107 is rotated at a constant speed in the other direction, and the driving unit 18 (refer to FIG. 5) is driven. By tracking control, the focusing unit 14 is allowed to track the laser light incident surface. At time T5, the processing position in the Z direction is the processing position when SD1 is formed, and the orientation of the beam shape 71 is the first orientation. The first area M31 along the line M3 is irradiated (ON) with the first laser light L1 and the first focusing point P1 is moved to form the modified area 4. In addition, the second area M32 along the line M3 is not irradiated (OFF) with the first laser light L1, and the formation of the modified area 4 is stopped.

在時間T6,持續實施SD1加工。在時間T6,使載置台107的另一方向之旋轉減速,停止追隨控制,將光束形狀71方位切換成第2方位,停止第1雷射光L1的照射。在時間T6,Z方向的加工位置為SD1形成時之加工位置。在時間T7,持續實施SD1加工。在時間T7,將載置台107朝一方向的旋轉方向加速。除此以外的時間T7的處理內容是與時間T6的處理內容相同。At time T6, the SD1 processing is continued. At time T6, the rotation of the stage 107 in the other direction is decelerated, the tracking control is stopped, the beam shape 71 is switched to the second direction, and the irradiation of the first laser light L1 is stopped. At time T6, the processing position in the Z direction is the processing position when SD1 is formed. At time T7, the SD1 processing is continued. At time T7, the rotation direction of the stage 107 in one direction is accelerated. The processing content of time T7 is the same as the processing content of time T6.

在時間T8,持續實施SD1加工。在時間T8,使載置台107朝一方向進行等速旋轉,驅動驅動部18(參照圖5),藉由追隨控制,讓聚光部14追隨雷射光射入面。在時間T8,Z方向的加工位置係為SD1形成時之加工位置,光束形狀71的方位為第2方位。沿著線M3的第2區域M32,照射(ON)第1雷射光L1並移動第1聚光點P1,形成改質區域4。另外,沿著線M3的第1區域M31,未照射(OFF)第1雷射光L1,停止改質區域4的形成。At time T8, SD1 processing is continued. At time T8, the stage 107 is rotated in one direction at a constant speed, and the driving unit 18 (refer to FIG. 5) is driven. By tracking control, the focusing unit 14 is allowed to track the laser light incident surface. At time T8, the processing position in the Z direction is the processing position when SD1 is formed, and the orientation of the beam shape 71 is the second orientation. The second area M32 along the line M3 is irradiated (ON) with the first laser light L1 and the first focusing point P1 is moved to form the modified area 4. In addition, the first area M31 along the line M3 is not irradiated (OFF) with the first laser light L1, and the formation of the modified area 4 is stopped.

在時間T9,持續實施SD1加工。在時間T9,使載置台107的一方向的旋轉減速,讓Z方向的加工位置朝SD2形成時的加工位置移動,停止追隨控制。在時間T9,將光束形狀71方位切換成第1方位,停止第1雷射光L1的照射。At time T9, the SD1 process is continued. At time T9, the rotation speed of the stage 107 in one direction is decelerated, and the processing position in the Z direction is moved toward the processing position when SD2 is formed, and the tracking control is stopped. At time T9, the beam shape 71 is switched to the first direction, and the irradiation of the first laser light L1 is stopped.

在時間T10,實施SD2形成之雷射加工(SD2加工)。在時間T10,將載置台107朝另一方向的旋轉方向加速。除此以外的時間T10的處理內容是與時間T9的處理內容相同。以後,在雷射加工完成為止,同樣地反覆進行處理。At time T10, laser processing for SD2 formation (SD2 processing) is performed. At time T10, the stage 107 is accelerated in the other rotational direction. The processing contents at time T10 are otherwise the same as those at time T9. Thereafter, the same processing is repeated until the laser processing is completed.

再者,等速包含大致等速之意。在追蹤加工之等速旋轉與改質區域4形成時之等速旋轉,旋轉速度亦可不同。改質區域4形成時之等速旋轉係為加工速度(脈衝間距)為一定之旋轉。等速旋轉時之雷射加工,可在成為等速旋轉後,從指定座標的位置(例如設有切痕等的θ方向位置)開始進行。在旋轉的減速與加速之期間,可暫時停止載置台107,亦可在該停止中變更Z方向的加工位置或光束形狀71的方位。該等狀況在以下的說明中也相同。Furthermore, constant speed includes the meaning of approximately constant speed. The rotation speed may be different between the constant speed rotation of the tracking process and the constant speed rotation when the modified area 4 is formed. The constant speed rotation when the modified area 4 is formed is a rotation with a constant processing speed (pulse interval). Laser processing during constant speed rotation can be started from a position of a specified coordinate (for example, a position in the θ direction where a cut is provided) after the constant speed rotation. During the period of deceleration and acceleration of the rotation, the mounting table 107 can be temporarily stopped, and the processing position in the Z direction or the orientation of the beam shape 71 can be changed during the stop. These conditions are also the same in the following description.

圖18係顯示以圖9的雷射加工裝置101執行雷射加工的情況之具體的第2運用例的時間圖表。在雷射加工裝置101,以圖18的時間圖表所示的順序,能夠執行各種處理。在圖18的例子,載置台107未朝θ方向的一方向連續旋轉,而是朝θ方向的一方向與另一方向旋轉。Fig. 18 is a timing chart showing a specific second operation example of laser processing performed by the laser processing apparatus 101 of Fig. 9. In the laser processing apparatus 101, various processes can be performed in the order shown in the timing chart of Fig. 18. In the example of Fig. 18, the stage 107 does not rotate continuously in one direction of the θ direction, but rotates in one direction and the other direction of the θ direction.

如圖18所示,直到時間T1為止,實施SD1加工。在到時間T1為止,將載置台107朝一方向的旋轉方向加速。將Z方向的加工位置作為SD1形成時之加工位置,停止追隨控制。將光束形狀71方位切換成第1方位。停止第1雷射光L1的照射。As shown in FIG. 18 , SD1 processing is performed until time T1. When time T1 is reached, the stage 107 is accelerated in a rotational direction in one direction. The processing position in the Z direction is used as the processing position when SD1 is formed, and the tracking control is stopped. The beam shape 71 is switched to the first orientation. The irradiation of the first laser light L1 is stopped.

在時間T2,持續實施SD1加工。在時間T2,使載置台107朝一方向進行等速旋轉,驅動驅動部18(參照圖5),藉由追隨控制,讓聚光部14追隨雷射光射入面。在時間T2,Z方向的加工位置係為SD1形成時之加工位置,光束形狀71的方位為第1方位。沿著線M3的第1區域M31,照射(ON)第1雷射光L1並移動第1聚光點P1,形成改質區域4。另外,沿著線M3的第2區域M32,未照射(OFF)第1雷射光L1,停止改質區域4的形成。At time T2, SD1 processing is continued. At time T2, the stage 107 is rotated in one direction at a constant speed, and the driving unit 18 (refer to FIG. 5) is driven. By tracking control, the focusing unit 14 is allowed to track the laser light incident surface. At time T2, the processing position in the Z direction is the processing position when SD1 is formed, and the orientation of the beam shape 71 is the first orientation. The first area M31 along the line M3 is irradiated (ON) with the first laser light L1 and the first focusing point P1 is moved to form the modified area 4. In addition, the second area M32 along the line M3 is not irradiated (OFF) with the first laser light L1, and the formation of the modified area 4 is stopped.

在時間T3,持續實施SD1加工。在時間T3,使載置台107的一方向的旋轉減速,讓Z方向的加工位置朝SD1形成時的加工位置移動,停止追隨控制。在時間T3,將光束形狀71方位切換成第2方位,停止第1雷射光L1的照射。在時間T4,持續實施SD1加工。在時間T4,將載置台107朝另一方向的旋轉方向加速。除此以外的時間T4的處理內容是與時間T3的處理內容相同。At time T3, the SD1 processing is continued. At time T3, the rotation of the stage 107 in one direction is decelerated, and the processing position in the Z direction is moved toward the processing position when SD1 is formed, and the tracking control is stopped. At time T3, the beam shape 71 is switched to the second direction, and the irradiation of the first laser light L1 is stopped. At time T4, the SD1 processing is continued. At time T4, the rotation direction of the stage 107 in the other direction is accelerated. The processing content of time T4 is the same as the processing content of time T3.

在時間T5,持續實施SD1加工。在時間T5,使載置台107朝另一方向進行等速旋轉,驅動驅動部18(參照圖5),藉由追隨控制,讓聚光部14追隨雷射光射入面。在時間T5,Z方向的加工位置係為SD1形成時之加工位置,光束形狀71的方位為第2方位。沿著線M3的第2區域M32,照射(ON)第1雷射光L1並移動第1聚光點P1,形成改質區域4。另外,沿著線M3的第1區域M31,未照射(OFF)第1雷射光L1,停止改質區域4的形成。At time T5, SD1 processing is continued. At time T5, the stage 107 is rotated at a constant speed in the other direction, and the driving unit 18 (refer to FIG. 5) is driven. By tracking control, the focusing unit 14 is allowed to track the laser light incident surface. At time T5, the processing position in the Z direction is the processing position when SD1 is formed, and the orientation of the beam shape 71 is the second orientation. The second area M32 along the line M3 is irradiated (ON) with the first laser light L1 and the first focusing point P1 is moved to form the modified area 4. In addition, the first area M31 along the line M3 is not irradiated (OFF) with the first laser light L1, and the formation of the modified area 4 is stopped.

在時間T6,持續實施SD1加工。在時間T6,使載置台107的另一方向之旋轉減速,將Z方向的加工位置朝SD2形成時的加工位置移動,停止追隨控制,將光束形狀71方位切換成第1方位,停止第1雷射光L1的照射。在時間T7,實施SD2加工。在時間T7,將載置台107朝一方向的旋轉方向加速。除此以外的時間T7的處理內容是與時間T6的處理內容相同。以後,在雷射加工完成為止,同樣地反覆進行處理。再者,在圖18的時間T2的追隨控制,作為測長範圍長之情況,實施追隨動作,但亦可在測長範圍窄之情況,實施記錄或再生的動作。At time T6, SD1 processing is continuously performed. At time T6, the rotation of the mounting table 107 in the other direction is decelerated, the processing position in the Z direction is moved toward the processing position when SD2 is formed, the tracking control is stopped, the orientation of the beam shape 71 is switched to the first orientation, and the irradiation of the first laser light L1 is stopped. At time T7, SD2 processing is performed. At time T7, the mounting table 107 is accelerated in the rotation direction in one direction. The processing contents of time T7 other than this are the same as those of time T6. Thereafter, the same processing is repeated until the laser processing is completed. Furthermore, in the tracking control at time T2 of FIG. 18, the tracking action is performed when the length measuring range is long, but the recording or reproducing action may also be performed when the length measuring range is narrow.

圖19係顯示以圖9的雷射加工裝置101執行雷射加工的情況之具體的第3運用例的時間圖表。在雷射加工裝置101,以圖19的時間圖表所示的順序,能夠執行各種處理。在圖19的例子,載置台107朝θ方向的一方向或另一方向連續旋轉。Fig. 19 is a timing chart showing a specific third operation example of laser processing performed by the laser processing apparatus 101 of Fig. 9. In the laser processing apparatus 101, various processes can be performed in the order shown in the timing chart of Fig. 19. In the example of Fig. 19, the stage 107 rotates continuously in one direction or the other direction of the θ direction.

如圖19所示,直到時間T1為止,實施追蹤加工。在到時間T1為止,將載置台107加速。將Z方向的加工位置作為雷射光射入面,停止追隨控制。將光束形狀71方位切換成第1方位。停止第1雷射光L1的照射。在時間T2,持續進行追蹤加工。在時間T2,使載置台107等速旋轉,藉由追隨控制,取得雷射光射入面的位移資料。除此以外的時間T2的處理內容是與時間T1的處理內容相同。As shown in FIG. 19 , tracking processing is performed until time T1. When time T1 is reached, the stage 107 is accelerated. The processing position in the Z direction is used as the laser light incident surface, and tracking control is stopped. The orientation of the beam shape 71 is switched to the first orientation. The irradiation of the first laser light L1 is stopped. At time T2, tracking processing is continued. At time T2, the stage 107 is rotated at a constant speed, and the displacement data of the laser light incident surface is obtained by tracking control. The processing content of time T2 is the same as that of time T1.

在時間T3,持續實施追蹤加工。在時間T3,維持載置台107的旋轉,讓Z方向的加工位置朝SD1形成時的加工位置移動,停止追隨控制。除此以外的時間T3的處理內容是與時間T2的處理內容相同。在時間T4,實施SD1加工。在時間T4,使載置台107等速旋轉,驅動驅動部18(參照圖5),藉由追隨控制,讓聚光部14追隨雷射光射入面。在時間T4,Z方向的加工位置係為SD1形成時之加工位置,光束形狀71的方位為第1方位。沿著線M3的第1區域M31,照射(ON)第1雷射光L1並移動第1聚光點P1,形成改質區域4。另外,沿著線M3的第2區域M32,未照射(OFF)第1雷射光L1,停止改質區域4的形成。At time T3, tracking processing is continued. At time T3, the rotation of the mounting table 107 is maintained, and the processing position in the Z direction is moved toward the processing position when SD1 is formed, and the tracking control is stopped. The processing content of time T3 is the same as the processing content of time T2. At time T4, SD1 processing is performed. At time T4, the mounting table 107 is rotated at a constant speed, and the driving part 18 (refer to Figure 5) is driven. Through tracking control, the focusing part 14 tracks the laser light incident surface. At time T4, the processing position in the Z direction is the processing position when SD1 is formed, and the orientation of the beam shape 71 is the first orientation. The first area M31 along the line M3 is irradiated (ON) with the first laser light L1 and the first focusing point P1 is moved to form a modified area 4. In addition, the second region M32 along the line M3 is not irradiated with the first laser light L1 (OFF), and the formation of the modified region 4 is stopped.

在時間T5,持續實施SD1加工。在時間T5,維持載置台107的旋轉,將Z方向的加工位置作為SD1形成時的加工位置,停止追隨控制,將光束形狀71方位切換成第2方位,停止第1雷射光L1的照射。At time T5, the SD1 processing is continued. At time T5, the rotation of the stage 107 is maintained, the processing position in the Z direction is set as the processing position when SD1 is formed, the tracking control is stopped, the beam shape 71 is switched to the second direction, and the irradiation of the first laser light L1 is stopped.

在時間T6,持續實施SD1加工。在時間T6,使載置台107等速旋轉,驅動驅動部18(參照圖5),藉由追隨控制,讓聚光部14追隨雷射光射入面。在時間T6,Z方向的加工位置係為SD1形成時之加工位置,光束形狀71的方位為第2方位。沿著線M3的第2區域M32,照射(ON)第1雷射光L1並移動第1聚光點P1,形成改質區域4。另外,沿著線M3的第1區域M31,未照射(OFF)第1雷射光L1,停止改質區域4的形成。At time T6, SD1 processing is continued. At time T6, the stage 107 is rotated at a constant speed to drive the driving unit 18 (see FIG. 5 ), and the focusing unit 14 is controlled to follow the laser light incident surface. At time T6, the processing position in the Z direction is the processing position when SD1 is formed, and the orientation of the beam shape 71 is the second orientation. The second area M32 along the line M3 is irradiated (ON) with the first laser light L1 and the first focusing point P1 is moved to form the modified area 4. In addition, the first area M31 along the line M3 is not irradiated (OFF) with the first laser light L1, and the formation of the modified area 4 is stopped.

在時間T7,持續實施SD1加工。在時間T7,維持載置台107的旋轉,讓Z方向的加工位置朝SD2形成時的加工位置移動,停止追隨控制。在時間T7,將光束形狀71方位切換成第1方位,停止第1雷射光L1的照射。At time T7, the SD1 process is continued. At time T7, the rotation of the stage 107 is maintained, the process position in the Z direction is moved toward the process position when SD2 is formed, and the tracking control is stopped. At time T7, the beam shape 71 is switched to the first direction, and the irradiation of the first laser light L1 is stopped.

在時間T8,實施SD2加工。在時間T8,使載置台107等速旋轉,驅動驅動部18(參照圖5),藉由追隨控制,讓聚光部14追隨雷射光射入面。在時間T8,Z方向的加工位置係為SD2形成時之加工位置,光束形狀71的方位為第1方位。沿著線M3的第1區域M31,照射(ON)第1雷射光L1並移動第1聚光點P1,形成改質區域4。另外,沿著線M3的第2區域M32,未照射(OFF)第1雷射光L1,停止改質區域4的形成。以後,在雷射加工完成為止,同樣地反覆進行處理。At time T8, SD2 processing is performed. At time T8, the stage 107 is rotated at a constant speed to drive the driving unit 18 (see FIG. 5 ), and the focusing unit 14 is controlled to follow the laser light incident surface by tracking. At time T8, the processing position in the Z direction is the processing position when SD2 is formed, and the orientation of the beam shape 71 is the first orientation. The first area M31 along the line M3 is irradiated (ON) with the first laser light L1 and the first focusing point P1 is moved to form the modified area 4. In addition, the second area M32 along the line M3 is not irradiated (OFF) with the first laser light L1, and the formation of the modified area 4 is stopped. Thereafter, the same process is repeated until the laser processing is completed.

再者,在時間T3、T5、T7之旋轉的維持,旋轉速度可為非等速,亦可將旋轉速度作成為可變,亦即,只要旋轉不會停止即可。在時間T3、T5、T7之旋轉的維持,切換光束形狀71的方位所需要的時間較長之情況,在該期間,亦可使載置台107旋轉2次旋轉以上。該等狀況在以下的說明中也相同。Furthermore, the rotation speed may be non-constant or variable during the rotation during the time periods T3, T5, and T7, that is, as long as the rotation does not stop. If the time required to switch the orientation of the beam shape 71 during the rotation during the time periods T3, T5, and T7 is long, the stage 107 may be rotated twice or more during this period. The same applies to the following description.

圖20係顯示以圖9的雷射加工裝置101執行雷射加工的情況之具體的第4運用例的時間圖表。在雷射加工裝置101,以圖20的時間圖表所示的順序,能夠執行各種處理。在圖20的例子,載置台107朝θ方向的一方向或另一方向連續旋轉。Fig. 20 is a timing chart showing a specific fourth operation example of laser processing performed by the laser processing apparatus 101 of Fig. 9. In the laser processing apparatus 101, various processes can be performed in the order shown in the timing chart of Fig. 20. In the example of Fig. 20, the stage 107 continuously rotates in one direction or the other direction of the θ direction.

如圖20所示,直到時間T1為止,實施SD1加工。在到時間T1為止,將載置台107加速。將Z方向的加工位置作為SD1形成時之加工位置,停止追隨控制。將光束形狀71方位切換成第1方位。停止第1雷射光L1的照射。As shown in FIG. 20 , SD1 processing is performed until time T1. When time T1 is reached, the stage 107 is accelerated. The processing position in the Z direction is set as the processing position when SD1 is formed, and the tracking control is stopped. The beam shape 71 is switched to the first orientation. The irradiation of the first laser beam L1 is stopped.

在時間T2,持續實施SD1加工。在時間T2,使載置台107等速旋轉,驅動驅動部18(參照圖5),藉由追隨控制,讓聚光部14追隨雷射光射入面。在時間T2,Z方向的加工位置係為SD1形成時之加工位置,光束形狀71的方位為第1方位。沿著線M3的第1區域M31,照射(ON)第1雷射光L1並移動第1聚光點P1,形成改質區域4。另外,沿著線M3的第2區域M32,未照射(OFF)第1雷射光L1,停止改質區域4的形成。At time T2, SD1 processing is continued. At time T2, the stage 107 is rotated at a constant speed to drive the driving unit 18 (see FIG. 5 ), and the focusing unit 14 is controlled to follow the laser light incident surface by tracking. At time T2, the processing position in the Z direction is the processing position when SD1 is formed, and the orientation of the beam shape 71 is the first orientation. The first area M31 along the line M3 is irradiated (ON) with the first laser light L1 and the first focusing point P1 is moved to form the modified area 4. In addition, the second area M32 along the line M3 is not irradiated (OFF) with the first laser light L1, and the formation of the modified area 4 is stopped.

在時間T3,持續實施SD1加工。在時間T3,維持載置台107的旋轉,讓Z方向的加工位置作為SD1形成時的加工位置,停止追隨控制。在時間T3,將光束形狀71方位切換成第2方位,停止第1雷射光L1的照射。At time T3, the SD1 processing is continued. At time T3, the rotation of the stage 107 is maintained, the processing position in the Z direction is set as the processing position when SD1 is formed, and the tracking control is stopped. At time T3, the beam shape 71 is switched to the second direction, and the irradiation of the first laser light L1 is stopped.

在時間T4,持續實施SD1加工。在時間T4,使載置台107朝另一方向進行等速旋轉,驅動驅動部18(參照圖5),藉由追隨控制,讓聚光部14追隨雷射光射入面。在時間T4,Z方向的加工位置係為SD1形成時之加工位置,光束形狀71的方位為第2方位。沿著線M3的第2區域M32,照射(ON)第1雷射光L1並移動第1聚光點P1,形成改質區域4。另外,沿著線M3的第1區域M31,未照射(OFF)第1雷射光L1,停止改質區域4的形成。At time T4, SD1 processing is continued. At time T4, the stage 107 is rotated at a constant speed in the other direction, and the driving unit 18 (refer to FIG. 5) is driven. By tracking control, the focusing unit 14 is allowed to track the laser light incident surface. At time T4, the processing position in the Z direction is the processing position when SD1 is formed, and the orientation of the beam shape 71 is the second orientation. The second area M32 along the line M3 is irradiated (ON) with the first laser light L1 and the first focusing point P1 is moved to form the modified area 4. In addition, the first area M31 along the line M3 is not irradiated (OFF) with the first laser light L1, and the formation of the modified area 4 is stopped.

在時間T5,持續實施SD1加工。在時間T6,維持載置台107的旋轉,將Z方向的加工位置朝SD2形成時的加工位置移動,停止追隨控制,將光束形狀71方位切換成第1方位,停止第1雷射光L1的照射。At time T5, SD1 processing is continued. At time T6, the processing position in the Z direction is moved toward the processing position when SD2 is formed while maintaining the rotation of the stage 107, the tracking control is stopped, the beam shape 71 is switched to the first orientation, and the irradiation of the first laser light L1 is stopped.

在時間T6,實施SD2加工。在時間T6,使載置台107等速旋轉,驅動驅動部18(參照圖5),藉由追隨控制,讓聚光部14追隨雷射光射入面。在時間T6,Z方向的加工位置係為SD2形成時之加工位置,光束形狀71的方位為第1方位。沿著線M3的第1區域M31,照射(ON)第1雷射光L1並移動第1聚光點P1,形成改質區域4。另外,沿著線M3的第2區域M32,未照射(OFF)第1雷射光L1,停止改質區域4的形成。以後,在雷射加工完成為止,同樣地反覆進行處理。At time T6, SD2 processing is performed. At time T6, the stage 107 is rotated at a constant speed to drive the driving unit 18 (see FIG. 5 ), and the focusing unit 14 is controlled to follow the laser light incident surface by tracking. At time T6, the processing position in the Z direction is the processing position when SD2 is formed, and the orientation of the beam shape 71 is the first orientation. The first area M31 along the line M3 is irradiated (ON) with the first laser light L1 and the first focusing point P1 is moved to form the modified area 4. In addition, the second area M32 along the line M3 is not irradiated (OFF) with the first laser light L1, and the formation of the modified area 4 is stopped. Thereafter, the same process is repeated until the laser processing is completed.

順便一提,在前述第1~第4運用例,沿著線M3的第1區域M31形成改質區域4後,在沿著線M3的第2區域M32形成改質區域4,但亦可為沿著第2區域M32形成改質區域4後,再沿著第1區域M31形成改質區域4。又,亦可為在沿著第2區域M32形成藉由SD1之改質區域4後,再沿著第2區域M32形成藉由SD2之改質區域4,並沿著第1區域M31形成藉由SD2之改質區域4。又,亦可為沿著第1區域M31形成藉由SD1之改質區域4,並沿著第1區域M31形成藉由SD2之改質區域4後,再沿著第2區域M32形成藉由SD1之改質區域4,並沿著第2區域M32形成藉由SD2之改質區域4。Incidentally, in the first to fourth operation examples, after the modified region 4 is formed along the first region M31 of the line M3, the modified region 4 is formed along the second region M32 of the line M3. However, the modified region 4 may be formed along the second region M32 and then the modified region 4 may be formed along the first region M31. Furthermore, after the modified region 4 by SD1 is formed along the second region M32, the modified region 4 by SD2 may be formed along the second region M32, and the modified region 4 by SD2 may be formed along the first region M31. Furthermore, after forming a modified region 4 by SD1 along the first region M31 and a modified region 4 by SD2 along the first region M31, a modified region 4 by SD1 along the second region M32 and a modified region 4 by SD2 along the second region M32 may be formed.

圖21(a)係顯示使光束形狀71的長度方向NH與加工行進方向BD一致之情況的修整加工後的對象物100的一部分之照片圖。圖21(b)係顯示藉由圖9的雷射加工裝置101之修整加工後的對象物100的一部分之照片圖。圖21(a)及圖21(b)的照片圖,係顯示以在對象物100沿著線M3的第1區域M31形成之改質區域4作為邊界而進行切斷的斷面圖之修整面。在圖21(a)及圖21(b)中的雷射加工,於對象物100,在Z方向形成呈7列之改質區域4。FIG. 21(a) is a photograph showing a portion of the object 100 after trimming processing in which the longitudinal direction NH of the beam shape 71 is aligned with the processing advancing direction BD. FIG. 21(b) is a photograph showing a portion of the object 100 after trimming processing by the laser processing device 101 of FIG. 9. The photographs of FIG. 21(a) and FIG. 21(b) show trimming surfaces of cross-sectional views cut with the modified region 4 formed in the first region M31 of the object 100 along the line M3 as a boundary. In the laser processing in FIG. 21(a) and FIG. 21(b), the modified region 4 is formed in 7 rows in the Z direction on the object 100.

在圖21(a),在SD1~SD7形成時,使光束形狀71的長度方向NH與加工行進方向BD一致。在圖21(b),在SD1~SD3形成時,在第1加工製程,調整光束形狀71的方位成為第1方位,在SD4~SD7形成時,使光束形狀71的長度方向NH與加工行進方向BD一致。對象物100係為以矽形成之鏡面晶圓,厚度為775μm。對象物100係以(100)面作為主面,阻抗率為1Ω・cm。以雷射光射入面作為背面100b,從表面100a到SD1之距離為60μm。In FIG. 21(a), when SD1 to SD7 are formed, the longitudinal direction NH of the beam shape 71 is made consistent with the processing direction BD. In FIG. 21(b), when SD1 to SD3 are formed, the orientation of the beam shape 71 is adjusted to the first orientation in the first processing step, and when SD4 to SD7 are formed, the longitudinal direction NH of the beam shape 71 is made consistent with the processing direction BD. The object 100 is a mirror wafer formed of silicon with a thickness of 775 μm. The object 100 has a (100) plane as the main surface and a resistivity of 1Ω・cm. The laser light incident surface is the back surface 100b, and the distance from the surface 100a to SD1 is 60 μm.

從圖21(a)及圖21(b)的對比得知,在沿著線M3的第1區域M31形成改質區域4之情況,確認到藉由將加工行進方向BD之光束形狀71的方位調整成為第1方位,可抑制從SD1到達表面100a之扭梳紋,能夠抑制品質惡化。From the comparison between Figure 21(a) and Figure 21(b), it can be seen that when the modified area 4 is formed in the first area M31 along the line M3, it is confirmed that by adjusting the orientation of the beam shape 71 in the processing direction BD to the first orientation, the twisted comb pattern reaching the surface 100a from SD1 can be suppressed, thereby suppressing quality deterioration.

圖22(a)係顯示使光束形狀71的長度方向NH與加工行進方向BD一致之情況的修整加工後的對象物100的一部分之照片圖。圖22(b)係顯示藉由圖9的雷射加工裝置101之修整加工後的對象物100的一部分之照片圖。圖22(a)及圖22(b)的照片圖,係顯示以在對象物100沿著線M3的第2區域M32形成之改質區域4作為邊界而進行切斷的斷面圖之修整面。Fig. 22(a) is a photograph showing a portion of the object 100 after trimming processing in which the longitudinal direction NH of the beam shape 71 is aligned with the processing advancing direction BD. Fig. 22(b) is a photograph showing a portion of the object 100 after trimming processing by the laser processing device 101 of Fig. 9. The photographs of Fig. 22(a) and Fig. 22(b) show trimmed surfaces of cross-sectional views cut with the modified region 4 formed in the second region M32 of the object 100 along the line M3 as a boundary.

在圖22(a),在SD1~SD7形成時,使光束形狀71的長度方向NH與加工行進方向BD一致。在圖22(b),在SD1~SD3形成時,在第2加工製程,調整光束形狀71的方位成為第2方位,在SD4~SD7形成時,使光束形狀71的長度方向NH與加工行進方向BD一致。對象物100係為以矽形成之鏡面晶圓,厚度為775μm。對象物100係以(100)面作為主面,阻抗率為1Ω・cm。以雷射光射入面作為背面100b,從表面100a到SD1之距離為60μm。In FIG. 22(a), when SD1 to SD7 are formed, the longitudinal direction NH of the beam shape 71 is made consistent with the processing direction BD. In FIG. 22(b), when SD1 to SD3 are formed, the orientation of the beam shape 71 is adjusted to the second orientation in the second processing step, and when SD4 to SD7 are formed, the longitudinal direction NH of the beam shape 71 is made consistent with the processing direction BD. The object 100 is a mirror wafer formed of silicon with a thickness of 775 μm. The object 100 has a (100) plane as the main surface and a resistivity of 1Ω・cm. The laser light incident surface is the back surface 100b, and the distance from the surface 100a to SD1 is 60 μm.

從圖22(a)及圖22(b)的對比得知,在沿著線M3的第2區域M32形成改質區域4之情況,確認到將朝向加工行進方向BD之光束形狀的方位調整成為第2方位,可抑制從SD1到達表面100a之扭梳紋,能夠抑制品質惡化。From the comparison between Figure 22(a) and Figure 22(b), it can be seen that when the modified area 4 is formed in the second area M32 along the line M3, it is confirmed that adjusting the orientation of the beam shape toward the processing direction BD to the second orientation can suppress the twisted comb pattern from SD1 to the surface 100a, thereby suppressing quality deterioration.

圖23係顯示修整加工後的對象物100的一部分之圖。圖23的照片圖,係顯示以在對象物100沿著線M3形成之改質區域4作為邊界而進行切斷的斷面圖之修整面。圖23的各照片圖,顯示下述情況的結果,亦即,當形成全列(SD1~SD7)的改質區域4時,將光束角度β設成為0°之情況;當形成SD1的改質區域4時,將光束角度β設成為+15°且當形成其他改質區域4時將光束角度β設定成0°之情況;當形成SD1及SD2的改質區域4時,將光束角度β設成為+15°且當形成其他改質區域4時將光束角度β設定成0°之情況;及當形成SD1~SD3的改質區域4時,將光束角度β設成為+15°且當形成其他改質區域4時將光束角度β設定成0°之情況。Fig. 23 is a diagram showing a portion of the trimmed object 100. The photograph of Fig. 23 shows a trimmed surface of a cross-sectional view cut with the modified region 4 formed along the line M3 in the object 100 as a boundary. The photographs of Figure 23 show the results of the following situations, namely, when forming the modified regions 4 of the entire row (SD1~SD7), the beam angle β is set to 0°; when forming the modified region 4 of SD1, the beam angle β is set to +15° and when forming other modified regions 4, the beam angle β is set to 0°; when forming the modified regions 4 of SD1 and SD2, the beam angle β is set to +15° and when forming other modified regions 4, the beam angle β is set to 0°; and when forming the modified regions 4 of SD1~SD3, the beam angle β is set to +15° and when forming other modified regions 4, the beam angle β is set to 0°.

如圖23所示,確認到當形成全列的改質區域4時,將光束角度β設定成0°之情況,加工品質惡化,調整光束角度β而形成的改質區域4之列數越增加,則加工品質變得越良好。並確認到調整光束角度β而形成的改質區域4之列數係從1列起就具有效果,若將調整光束角度β而形成的改質區域4形成3列的話,則能夠達到更理想的雷射加工。As shown in FIG. 23 , it was confirmed that when the beam angle β was set to 0° when forming a full row of modified regions 4, the processing quality deteriorated, and the more the number of rows of modified regions 4 formed by adjusting the beam angle β increased, the better the processing quality became. It was also confirmed that the number of rows of modified regions 4 formed by adjusting the beam angle β was effective starting from 1 row, and that more ideal laser processing could be achieved if the number of rows of modified regions 4 formed by adjusting the beam angle β was 3 rows.

圖24係顯示將使光束角度β及加工角度α改變的情況之加工品質進行評價的實驗結果總結之表格。圖25~54係顯示圖24的實驗結果之各對象物100的修整面的照片圖。在此的評價試驗,在對象物100形成複數列的改質區域4。對象物100係為以矽形成之鏡面晶圓,以(100)面作為主面,阻抗率為1Ω・cm。雷射光射入面為背面100b。在圖24中,將非常良好的加工品質顯示為「○」、將良好(大致良好)的加工品質顯示為「△」、將惡化的加工品質顯示為「×」。在SD1(距離雷射光射入面最遠的位置之改質區域4)的底下產生扭梳紋,其未到達雷射光射入面相反側之面亦即表面100a這種情況,視為良好的加工品質(圖24中的「△」)。FIG. 24 is a table showing a summary of experimental results of evaluating the processing quality when the beam angle β and the processing angle α are changed. FIG. 25 to FIG. 54 are photographs of the trimmed surface of each object 100 showing the experimental results of FIG. 24. In this evaluation test, a plurality of rows of modified regions 4 are formed on the object 100. The object 100 is a mirror wafer formed of silicon, with the (100) plane as the main surface and a resistivity of 1Ω・cm. The laser light incident surface is the back surface 100b. In FIG. 24, very good processing quality is indicated as "○", good (roughly good) processing quality is indicated as "△", and deteriorated processing quality is indicated as "×". Twist comb lines are generated under SD1 (modified region 4 at the farthest position from the laser light incident surface), but they do not reach the surface 100a on the opposite side of the laser light incident surface, which is considered to be a good processing quality ("△" in Figure 24).

如圖24、圖25及圖40所示,得知在加工角度α為0°的情況,得知當光束角度β為5°~30°及-5°~-30°時,加工品質非常良好。如圖24、圖26及圖41所示,得知在加工角度α為5°的情況,得知當光束角度β為10°~35°時,加工品質非常良好。As shown in Figures 24, 25 and 40, when the processing angle α is 0°, the processing quality is very good when the beam angle β is 5° to 30° and -5° to -30°. As shown in Figures 24, 26 and 41, when the processing angle α is 5°, the processing quality is very good when the beam angle β is 10° to 35°.

如圖24、圖27及圖42所示,得知在加工角度α為10°的情況,得知當光束角度β為10°~35°時,加工品質非常良好。如圖24、圖28及圖43所示,得知在加工角度α為15°的情況,得知當光束角度β為5°~10°及20°時,加工品質非常良好。As shown in Figures 24, 27 and 42, when the processing angle α is 10°, the processing quality is very good when the beam angle β is 10° to 35°. As shown in Figures 24, 28 and 43, when the processing angle α is 15°, the processing quality is very good when the beam angle β is 5° to 10° and 20°.

如圖24、圖29及圖44所示,得知在加工角度α為20°的情況,得知當光束角度β為0°~35°時,加工品質非常良好。如圖24、圖30及圖45所示,得知在加工角度α為22.5°的情況,得知當光束角度β為-5°~30°時,加工品質非常良好。As shown in Figures 24, 29 and 44, when the processing angle α is 20°, the processing quality is very good when the beam angle β is 0° to 35°. As shown in Figures 24, 30 and 45, when the processing angle α is 22.5°, the processing quality is very good when the beam angle β is -5° to 30°.

如圖24、圖31及圖46所示,得知在加工角度α為25°的情況,得知當光束角度β為0°~30°時,加工品質非常良好。如圖24、圖32及圖47所示,得知在加工角度α為30°的情況,得知當光束角度β為0°~10°及22°~25°時,加工品質非常良好。As shown in Figures 24, 31 and 46, when the processing angle α is 25°, the processing quality is very good when the beam angle β is 0° to 30°. As shown in Figures 24, 32 and 47, when the processing angle α is 30°, the processing quality is very good when the beam angle β is 0° to 10° and 22° to 25°.

如圖24、圖33及圖48所示,得知在加工角度α為35°的情況,得知當光束角度β為0°~22°時,加工品質非常良好。如圖24、圖34及圖49所示,得知在加工角度α為40°的情況,得知當光束角度β為0°~10°時,加工品質非常良好。As shown in Figures 24, 33 and 48, when the processing angle α is 35°, the processing quality is very good when the beam angle β is 0° to 22°. As shown in Figures 24, 34 and 49, when the processing angle α is 40°, the processing quality is very good when the beam angle β is 0° to 10°.

如圖24、圖35及圖50所示,得知在加工角度α為45°的情況,得知當光束角度β為-5°~10°、-15°及-22°時,加工品質非常良好。如圖24、圖36及圖51所示,得知在加工角度α為50°的情況,得知當光束角度β為-5°~0°、 -15°及-22°時,加工品質非常良好。As shown in Figures 24, 35 and 50, when the processing angle α is 45°, the processing quality is very good when the beam angle β is -5° to 10°, -15° and -22°. As shown in Figures 24, 36 and 51, when the processing angle α is 50°, the processing quality is very good when the beam angle β is -5° to 0°, -15° and -22°.

如圖24、圖37及圖52所示,得知在加工角度α為55°的情況,得知當光束角度β為-30°~0°及-5°時,加工品質非常良好。如圖24、圖38及圖53所示,得知在加工角度α為80°的情況,得知當光束角度β為-35°~-15°時,加工品質非常良好。 如圖24、圖39及圖54所示,得知在加工角度α為85°的情況,得知當光束角度β為-35°~-10°時,加工品質非常良好。As shown in Figures 24, 37 and 52, when the processing angle α is 55°, the processing quality is very good when the beam angle β is -30° to 0° and -5°. As shown in Figures 24, 38 and 53, when the processing angle α is 80°, the processing quality is very good when the beam angle β is -35° to -15°. As shown in Figures 24, 39 and 54, when the processing angle α is 85°, the processing quality is very good when the beam angle β is -35° to -10°.

如圖24~圖54的結果所示,得知在使光束形狀71的長度方向NH與加工行進方向BD一致之情況,品質稍許惡化之加工角度α為15°~30°及60°~75°。此加工角度區域(15°~30°及60°~75°),加工品質改善效果尤其顯著之光束角度β為0°~35°。又,得知在使光束形狀71的長度方向NH與加工行進方向BD一致之情況,品質特別急遽惡化之加工角度α為5°~15°及75°~85°。此加工角度區域(5°~15°及75°~85°),加工品質改善效果尤其顯著之光束角度β為10°~35°及-35°~-10°。As shown in the results of Figures 24 to 54, it is known that when the longitudinal direction NH of the beam shape 71 is aligned with the processing direction BD, the processing angle α at which the quality is slightly deteriorated is 15° to 30° and 60° to 75°. In this processing angle range (15° to 30° and 60° to 75°), the beam angle β at which the processing quality improvement effect is particularly significant is 0° to 35°. In addition, it is known that when the longitudinal direction NH of the beam shape 71 is aligned with the processing direction BD, the processing angle α at which the quality is particularly rapidly deteriorated is 5° to 15° and 75° to 85°. In this processing angle range (5° to 15° and 75° to 85°), the beam angle β at which the processing quality improvement effect is particularly significant is 10° to 35° and -35° to -10°.

在加工角度α為0°以上到45°,在品質惡化尤其急遽的加工角度α之5°~15°的加工品質改善尤為重要,因此,光束角度β作成為該時的改善效果尤其顯著之10°~35°為佳。在加工角度α為45°以上未滿90°,在品質惡化尤其急遽的加工角度α之75°~85°的加工品質改善尤為重要,因此,光束角度β作成為該時的改善效果尤其顯著之 -35°~-10°為佳。When the processing angle α is between 0° and 45°, the processing quality improvement at 5° to 15° of the processing angle α where the quality deterioration is particularly rapid is particularly important, so the beam angle β is preferably set to 10° to 35°, where the improvement effect is particularly significant. When the processing angle α is between 45° and 90°, the processing quality improvement at 75° to 85° of the processing angle α where the quality deterioration is particularly rapid is particularly important, so the beam angle β is preferably set to -35° to -10°, where the improvement effect is particularly significant.

[第2實施形態] 其次,說明關於第2實施形態之雷射加工裝置。在第2實施形態的說明中,說明關於與第1實施形態不同的點,省略與第1實施形態重複之說明。[Second embodiment] Next, the laser processing device of the second embodiment is described. In the description of the second embodiment, the differences from the first embodiment are described, and the descriptions repeated in the first embodiment are omitted.

本實施形態的加工控制部9c係執行環繞處理,其是在對象物100,藉由沿著線M3使第1聚光點P1相對地移動1周,形成沿著線M3的環狀之改質區域4。在環繞處理,一邊使載置台107旋轉,一邊照射第1雷射光L1,使第1聚光點P1位於對象物100的Z方向之預定位置,當從第1雷射光L1的該照射開始進行到載置台107旋轉1圈(旋轉360°)時停止該照射,藉此,形成沿著線M3的環狀之改質區域4。The processing control unit 9c of this embodiment performs a circumferential processing, which forms a ring-shaped modified area 4 along the line M3 by relatively moving the first focal point P1 along the line M3 on the object 100. In the circumferential processing, the first laser light L1 is irradiated while the stage 107 is rotated so that the first focal point P1 is located at a predetermined position in the Z direction of the object 100. When the irradiation of the first laser light L1 starts and the stage 107 rotates one circle (rotates 360 degrees), the irradiation is stopped, thereby forming a ring-shaped modified area 4 along the line M3.

本實施形態的調整部9d係在沿著線M3使第1聚光點P1相對地移動的期間,調整長度方向NH的方位,使其成為藉由決定部9b所決定的方位。具體而言,調整部9d係在以加工控制部9c執行環繞處理,沿著線M3使第1聚光點P1相對地移動1圈之期間,在第1聚光點P1位於第1區域M31的情況,即時地切換長度方向NH的方位,使其成為第1方位(參照圖55(b)及圖57(b)),在第1聚光點P1位於第2區域M32的情況,即時地切換長度方向NH的方位,使其成為第2方位(參照圖56(b)及圖58(b))。The adjustment unit 9d of this embodiment adjusts the orientation of the longitudinal direction NH to the orientation determined by the determination unit 9b while the first light-converging point P1 is relatively moved along the line M3. Specifically, when the process control unit 9c performs the circumferential process and relatively moves the first light-converging point P1 by one circle along the line M3, the adjustment unit 9d instantly switches the orientation of the longitudinal direction NH to the first orientation when the first light-converging point P1 is located in the first area M31 (refer to FIG. 55(b) and FIG. 57(b)), and instantly switches the orientation of the longitudinal direction NH to the second orientation when the first light-converging point P1 is located in the second area M32 (refer to FIG. 56(b) and FIG. 58(b)).

在本實施形態的雷射加工裝置101,例如實施以下所述的修整加工。In the laser processing apparatus 101 of the present embodiment, for example, the trimming process described below is performed.

如圖55(a)所示,一邊使載置台107旋轉一邊照射第1雷射光L1,沿著線M3的第1區域M31使第1聚光點P1相對地移動。藉此,在對象物100之Z方向的預定位置,沿著第1區域M31形成改質區域4。此時,光束形狀71的方位係藉由調整部9d,調整成如圖55(b)所示之第1方位。As shown in FIG. 55(a), the first laser light L1 is irradiated while the stage 107 is rotated, and the first focal point P1 is relatively moved along the first area M31 of the line M3. Thus, the modified area 4 is formed along the first area M31 at a predetermined position in the Z direction of the object 100. At this time, the orientation of the beam shape 71 is adjusted to the first orientation shown in FIG. 55(b) by the adjusting section 9d.

當第1聚光點P1從第1區域M31朝第2區域M32移動時,藉由調整部9d,將光束形狀71的方位調整成為如圖56(b)所示的第2方位(調整製程)。如圖56(a)所示,持續一邊使載置台107旋轉一邊照射第1雷射光L1,沿著線M3的第2區域M32使第1聚光點P1相對地移動。藉此,在對象物100之Z方向的預定位置,沿著第2區域M32形成改質區域4。When the first focal point P1 moves from the first area M31 to the second area M32, the orientation of the beam shape 71 is adjusted to the second orientation as shown in FIG. 56(b) by the adjusting section 9d (adjustment process). As shown in FIG. 56(a), the first laser light L1 is continuously irradiated while the stage 107 is rotated, and the first focal point P1 is relatively moved along the second area M32 of the line M3. In this way, the modified area 4 is formed along the second area M32 at a predetermined position in the Z direction of the object 100.

當第1聚光點P1從第2區域M32朝第1區域M31移動時,藉由調整部9d,將光束形狀71的方位調整成為如圖57(b)所示的第1方位(調整製程)。如圖57(a)所示,持續一邊使載置台107旋轉一邊照射第1雷射光L1,沿著線M3的第1區域M31使第1聚光點P1相對地移動。藉此,在對象物100之Z方向的預定位置,沿著第1區域M31形成改質區域4。When the first focal point P1 moves from the second region M32 toward the first region M31, the orientation of the beam shape 71 is adjusted to the first orientation as shown in FIG. 57(b) by the adjusting section 9d (adjustment process). As shown in FIG. 57(a), the first laser light L1 is continuously irradiated while the stage 107 is rotated, and the first focal point P1 is relatively moved along the first region M31 of the line M3. In this way, the modified region 4 is formed along the first region M31 at a predetermined position in the Z direction of the object 100.

當第1聚光點P1從第1區域M31朝第2區域M32移動時,藉由調整部9d,將光束形狀71的方位調整成為如圖58(b)所示的第2方位(調整製程)。如圖58(a)所示,持續一邊使載置台107旋轉一邊照射第1雷射光L1,沿著線M3的第2區域M32使第1聚光點P1相對地移動。藉此,在對象物100之Z方向的預定位置,沿著第2區域M32形成改質區域4。將這樣沿著第1區域M31及第2區域M32之第1聚光點P1的移動,從第1雷射光L1照射開始直到載置台107旋轉1圈(旋轉360°)為止反覆進行後,停止該照射。When the first focal point P1 moves from the first area M31 to the second area M32, the orientation of the beam shape 71 is adjusted to the second orientation as shown in FIG. 58(b) by the adjusting section 9d (adjustment process). As shown in FIG. 58(a), the first laser light L1 is continuously irradiated while the stage 107 is rotated, and the first focal point P1 is relatively moved along the second area M32 of the line M3. In this way, a modified area 4 is formed along the second area M32 at a predetermined position in the Z direction of the object 100. After the movement of the first focal point P1 along the first area M31 and the second area M32 is repeated from the start of irradiation with the first laser light L1 until the stage 107 rotates one circle (rotates 360°), the irradiation is stopped.

改變修整預定位置的Z方向位置,反覆進行前述雷射加工。藉由以上方式,在對象物100的內部,沿著有效區域R的周緣之線M3,於Z方向上形成複數列的改質區域4。The Z-direction position of the predetermined trimming position is changed, and the aforementioned laser processing is repeated. In the above manner, a plurality of rows of modified regions 4 are formed in the Z-direction along the line M3 of the periphery of the effective region R inside the object 100.

以上,在本實施形態的雷射加工裝置101,在沿著線M3使第1聚光點P1相對地移動的期間,將光束形狀71的長度方向NH的方位調整成為與加工行進方向BD交叉的方位,亦即依據對象物資訊及線資訊所決定之方位。因此,僅在長度方向NH與加工行進方向BD一致的狀態下,沿著線M3,使第1聚光點P1相對地移動,使得在例如因對象物100的物性,依據部位不同,會有修整面之品質降低這種情況,也能抑制這種修整面的品質降低。因此,可抑制去除了外緣部分亦即去除區域E之對象物100的修整面的品質會依據部位不同而降低的情事。As described above, in the laser processing device 101 of the present embodiment, while the first light-converging point P1 is relatively moved along the line M3, the orientation of the longitudinal direction NH of the beam shape 71 is adjusted to an orientation intersecting with the processing travel direction BD, that is, an orientation determined based on the object information and the line information. Therefore, only when the longitudinal direction NH is consistent with the processing travel direction BD, the first light-converging point P1 is relatively moved along the line M3, so that even if the quality of the trimmed surface is degraded depending on the part due to the physical properties of the object 100, the degraded quality of the trimmed surface can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the degraded quality of the trimmed surface of the object 100 from which the outer edge portion, that is, the removed area E, depending on the part.

尤其是在本實施形態,能夠一邊沿著線M3形成改質區域4,一邊將長度方向NH的方位即時地改變成為依據對象物資訊及線資訊所決定的方位。既可謀求手法提升,亦可抑制修整面的品質降低。In particular, in this embodiment, the modified area 4 can be formed along the line M3 while the orientation of the longitudinal direction NH can be instantly changed to an orientation determined based on the object information and the line information. This can improve the technique while suppressing the degradation of the quality of the finished surface.

在本實施形態的雷射加工裝置101,決定部9b係決定沿著線M3的第1區域M31使第1聚光點P1相對地移動的情況之長度方向NH的方位亦即第1方位、和沿著線M3的第2區域M32使第1聚光點P1相對地移動的情況之長度方向NH的方位亦即第2方位。調整部9d係在沿著線M3使第1聚光點P1相對地移動的期間,在第1聚光點P1位於第1區域M31的情況,調整長度方向NH的方位,使其成為第1方位。調整部9d係在第1聚光點P1位於第2區域M32的情況,調整長度方向NH的方位,使其成為第2方位。藉此,可更確實地抑制分別在第1區域M31及第2區域M32中,對象物100的修整面的品質降低的情事。In the laser processing device 101 of the present embodiment, the determination unit 9b determines the first orientation, which is the orientation of the longitudinal direction NH when the first light-converging point P1 is relatively moved along the first area M31 of the line M3, and the second orientation, which is the orientation of the longitudinal direction NH when the first light-converging point P1 is relatively moved along the second area M32 of the line M3. The adjustment unit 9d adjusts the orientation of the longitudinal direction NH to the first orientation when the first light-converging point P1 is located in the first area M31 during the period of relatively moving the first light-converging point P1 along the line M3. The adjustment unit 9d adjusts the orientation of the longitudinal direction NH to the second orientation when the first light-converging point P1 is located in the second area M32. Thereby, it is possible to more reliably suppress the degradation of the quality of the trimmed surface of the object 100 in the first area M31 and the second area M32.

在藉由雷射加工裝置101之雷射加工方法,在沿著線M3使第1聚光點P1相對地移動的期間,將光束形狀71的長度方向NH的方位調整成為與加工行進方向BD交叉的方位,亦即依據對象物資訊及線資訊所決定之方位。因此,僅在長度方向NH與加工行進方向BD一致的狀態下,沿著線M3,使第1聚光點P1相對地移動,使得在例如因對象物100的物性,依據部位不同,會有修整面之品質降低這種情況,也能抑制這種修整面的品質降低。因此,可抑制去除了外緣部分亦即去除區域E之對象物100的修整面的品質會依據部位不同而降低的情事。In the laser processing method using the laser processing device 101, while the first focal point P1 is relatively moved along the line M3, the orientation of the longitudinal direction NH of the beam shape 71 is adjusted to an orientation that intersects with the processing direction BD, that is, an orientation determined based on the object information and the line information. Therefore, only when the longitudinal direction NH is consistent with the processing direction BD, the first focal point P1 is relatively moved along the line M3, so that even if the quality of the trimmed surface is reduced depending on the part due to the physical properties of the object 100, the reduction in the quality of the trimmed surface can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the situation that the quality of the trimmed surface of the object 100 from which the outer edge portion, that is, the area E, is removed, is reduced depending on the part.

順便一提,在本實施形態,切換光束形狀71的方位之時間點,係在以線M3與第2結晶方位K2正交的1點作為0°的點之情況,線M3的0°、45°、90°、135°、180°及225°之各點及第1聚光點P1位於其附近之時間點。藉此,能夠在光束角度β的影響,對加工品質較難的時間點,切換光束形狀71的方位。By the way, in the present embodiment, the time point for switching the orientation of the beam shape 71 is when the point at which the line M3 intersects the second crystal orientation K2 orthogonally is taken as the 0° point, and the points at 0°, 45°, 90°, 135°, 180° and 225° of the line M3 and the first focal point P1 are located near the point. In this way, the orientation of the beam shape 71 can be switched at a time point when the influence of the beam angle β makes it difficult to achieve processing quality.

光束形狀71的方位之切換係以光束角度β不會變化±35°以上的方式執行。亦即,在使光束形狀71的方位改變的情況,有使光束形狀71朝順時鐘方向旋轉的情況和使光束形狀71朝逆時鐘方向旋轉的情況,其中,在圖59(a)的例子,使光束形狀71朝順時鐘方向旋轉,光束角度β不會改變±35°以上。這是因為如圖59(b)的例子,若使光束角度β改變±35°以上而切換光束形狀71的方位的話,加工品質會惡化。再者,在使用反射型空間光調變器34切換光束形狀71的方位的情況,由於光束角度β瞬間改變,故,亦可不限制前述光束角度β的切換。The switching of the orientation of the beam shape 71 is performed in such a manner that the beam angle β does not change by more than ±35°. That is, when changing the orientation of the beam shape 71, there are two cases where the beam shape 71 is rotated in the clockwise direction and the beam shape 71 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction. In the example of FIG. 59(a), when the beam shape 71 is rotated in the clockwise direction, the beam angle β does not change by more than ±35°. This is because, as in the example of FIG. 59(b), if the orientation of the beam shape 71 is switched by changing the beam angle β by more than ±35°, the processing quality will deteriorate. Furthermore, when using the reflective spatial light modulator 34 to switch the orientation of the beam shape 71, since the beam angle β changes instantaneously, the switching of the aforementioned beam angle β may not be restricted.

[第3實施形態] 其次,說明關於第3實施形態之雷射加工裝置。在第3實施形態的說明中,說明關於與第2實施形態不同的點,省略與第2實施形態重複之說明。[Third embodiment] Next, the laser processing device of the third embodiment is described. In the description of the third embodiment, the differences from the second embodiment are described, and the descriptions repeated with the second embodiment are omitted.

本實施形態的決定部9b係依據藉由取得部9a所取得的對象物資訊及線資訊,在每個加工角度α,決定沿著線M3使第1聚光點P1相對地移動的情況之長度方向NH的方位。作為一例,決定部9b,係以第1結晶方位K1及第2結晶方位K2中之與加工行進方向BD之間的角度較大的一方接近的方式,將長度方向NH的方位決定成對加工行進方向BD傾斜之方向的方位,且因應加工角度α之方向的方位。決定部9b係在加工角度α為0°以上未滿22.5°的期間,將長度方向NH的方位決定成為隨著加工角度α變大,光束角度β朝正側變大。在加工角度α為22.5°以上未滿45°的期間,將長度方向NH的方位決定成為隨著加工角度α變大,正側的光束角度β變小。在加工角度α為45°以上未滿67.5°的期間,將長度方向NH的方位決定成為隨著加工角度α變大,光束角度β朝負側變大。在加工角度α為67.5°以上未滿90°的期間,將長度方向NH的方位決定成為隨著加工角度α變大,負側的光束角度β變小(光束角度β接近0)。The determination unit 9b of this embodiment determines the orientation of the longitudinal direction NH when the first focal point P1 is relatively moved along the line M3 at each processing angle α based on the object information and line information obtained by the acquisition unit 9a. As an example, the determination unit 9b determines the orientation of the longitudinal direction NH to be the orientation of the direction inclined to the processing direction BD and the orientation of the direction corresponding to the processing angle α in such a manner that the first crystal orientation K1 and the second crystal orientation K2 are close to the one with a larger angle with the processing direction BD. The determination unit 9b determines the orientation of the longitudinal direction NH to be the orientation of the direction inclined to the processing direction BD and the orientation of the direction corresponding to the processing angle α when the processing angle α is greater than 0° and less than 22.5°. When the processing angle α is greater than 22.5° and less than 45°, the orientation of the longitudinal direction NH is determined so that the beam angle β on the positive side decreases as the processing angle α increases. When the processing angle α is greater than 45° and less than 67.5°, the orientation of the longitudinal direction NH is determined so that the beam angle β increases toward the negative side as the processing angle α increases. When the processing angle α is greater than 67.5° and less than 90°, the orientation of the longitudinal direction NH is determined so that the beam angle β on the negative side decreases as the processing angle α increases (the beam angle β approaches 0).

本實施形態的調整部9d係在沿著線M3使第1聚光點P1相對地移動的期間,以連續地改變的方式,調整長度方向NH的方位。調整部9d係在沿著線M3使第1聚光點P1相對地移動的期間,因應加工角度α,連續地改變成為藉由決定部9b所決定的方位。The adjustment unit 9d of this embodiment adjusts the orientation of the longitudinal direction NH in a continuously changing manner while the first focal point P1 is relatively moved along the line M3. The adjustment unit 9d continuously changes the orientation determined by the determination unit 9b in accordance with the processing angle α while the first focal point P1 is relatively moved along the line M3.

在本實施形態的雷射加工裝置101,例如實施以下所述的修整加工。In the laser processing apparatus 101 of the present embodiment, for example, the trimming process described below is performed.

藉由決定部9b,針對每個加工角度α,因應該加工角度α決定沿著線M3使第1聚光點P1相對地移動的情況之長度方向NH的方位(決定製程)。一邊使載置台107旋轉一邊照射第1雷射光L1,沿著線M3使第1聚光點P1相對地移動。藉此,在對象物100之Z方向的預定位置,沿著線M3形成改質區域4。The determination unit 9b determines the orientation of the longitudinal direction NH when the first focal point P1 is relatively moved along the line M3 for each processing angle α according to the processing angle α (determination process). The first laser light L1 is irradiated while the stage 107 is rotated, and the first focal point P1 is relatively moved along the line M3. In this way, the modified area 4 is formed along the line M3 at a predetermined position in the Z direction of the object 100.

此時,使長度方向NH的方位連續地改變成為因應加工角度α所決定的方位(調整製程)。如圖60(a)及圖60(b)所示,例如在加工角度α為0°的情況(第1聚光點P1位於線M3的0°的點Q1的情況),將光束形狀71的方位調整成為光束角度β為0°之方位。如圖61(a)及圖61(b)所示,例如在加工角度α為5°~15°的情況(第1聚光點P1位於線M3的5°~15°的點Q2的情況),將光束形狀71的方位調整成為光束角度β為10°~35°之方位。At this time, the orientation of the longitudinal direction NH is continuously changed to an orientation determined in accordance with the processing angle α (adjustment process). As shown in FIG. 60(a) and FIG. 60(b), for example, when the processing angle α is 0° (when the first focal point P1 is located at point Q1 at 0° of line M3), the orientation of the beam shape 71 is adjusted to an orientation where the beam angle β is 0°. As shown in FIG. 61(a) and FIG. 61(b), for example, when the processing angle α is 5° to 15° (when the first focal point P1 is located at point Q2 at 5° to 15° of line M3), the orientation of the beam shape 71 is adjusted to an orientation where the beam angle β is 10° to 35°.

如圖62(a)及圖62(b)所示,例如在加工角度α為45°的情況(第1聚光點P1位於線M3的0°的點Q3的情況),將光束形狀71的方位調整成為光束角度β為0°之方位。在加工角度α為45°的情況,由於藉由第1結晶方位K1之龜裂伸展力與藉由第2結晶方位K2之龜裂伸展力互相均衡(互相拉引),故,不需要使光束形狀71的方位從加工行進方向BD傾斜。As shown in FIG. 62(a) and FIG. 62(b), for example, when the processing angle α is 45° (when the first light-converging point P1 is located at point Q3 of 0° on line M3), the orientation of the beam shape 71 is adjusted to an orientation where the beam angle β is 0°. When the processing angle α is 45°, since the tortoise-crack extension force by the first crystal orientation K1 and the tortoise-crack extension force by the second crystal orientation K2 are balanced (pulled together), it is not necessary to tilt the orientation of the beam shape 71 from the processing advancing direction BD.

如圖63(a)及圖63(b)所示,例如在加工角度α為75°~85°的情況(第1聚光點P1位於線M3的75°~85°的點Q4的情況),將光束形狀71的方位調整成為光束角度β為  -35°~-10°之方位。As shown in Figures 63(a) and 63(b), for example, when the processing angle α is 75° to 85° (when the first focal point P1 is located at point Q4 at 75° to 85° of line M3), the azimuth of the beam shape 71 is adjusted to a beam angle β of -35° to -10°.

如圖64(a)及圖64(b)所示,例如在加工角度α為90°的情況(第1聚光點P1位於線M3的90°的點Q5的情況),將光束形狀71的方位調整成為光束角度β為0°之方位。將這樣沿著線M3之第1聚光點P1的移動,從第1雷射光L1照射開始直到載置台107旋轉1圈(旋轉360°)為止反覆進行後,停止該照射。As shown in FIG. 64 (a) and FIG. 64 (b), for example, when the processing angle α is 90° (when the first light-converging point P1 is located at point Q5 at 90° of line M3), the azimuth of the beam shape 71 is adjusted to a azimuth where the beam angle β is 0°. The movement of the first light-converging point P1 along line M3 is repeated from the start of irradiation with the first laser light L1 until the stage 107 rotates once (rotates 360°), and then the irradiation is stopped.

改變修整預定位置的Z方向位置,反覆進行前述雷射加工。藉由以上方式,在對象物100的內部,沿著有效區域R的周緣之線M3,於Z方向上形成複數列的改質區域4。The Z-direction position of the predetermined trimming position is changed, and the aforementioned laser processing is repeated. In the above manner, a plurality of rows of modified regions 4 are formed in the Z-direction along the line M3 of the periphery of the effective region R inside the object 100.

如以上所述,在本實施形態的雷射加工裝置101,亦可抑制去除了外緣部分亦即去除區域E之對象物100的修整面的品質會依據部位不同而降低的情事。As described above, in the laser processing apparatus 101 of the present embodiment, it is also possible to suppress the situation in which the quality of the trimmed surface of the object 100 where the outer edge portion, that is, the removal area E, is removed is degraded depending on the location.

在本實施形態的雷射加工裝置101,調整部9d係在沿著線M3使第1聚光點P1相對地移動的期間,以連續地改變的方式,調整長度方向NH的方位。藉此,可更確實地抑制在線M3的各部位,對象物100的修整面之品質降低。In the laser processing device 101 of the present embodiment, the adjustment section 9d adjusts the orientation in the longitudinal direction NH in a continuously changing manner while relatively moving the first focal point P1 along the line M3. This can more reliably suppress the quality degradation of the trimmed surface of the object 100 at each portion of the line M3.

在本實施形態的雷射加工裝置101,對象物係為以(100)面作為主面,且具有第1結晶方位K1、及第2結晶方位K2之晶圓。決定部9b,係針對每個加工角度α,決定沿著線M3使第1聚光點P1相對地移動的情況之長度方向NH的方位。調整部9d係在沿著線M3使第1聚光點P1相對地移動的期間,因應加工角度α,連續地改變成為藉由決定部9b所決定的方位。藉此,即使在對象物100為以(100)面作為主面的晶圓之情況,亦可更確實地抑制在線M3的各部位,對象物100的修整面的品質降低的情事。In the laser processing device 101 of the present embodiment, the object is a wafer having the (100) plane as the main surface and having a first crystal orientation K1 and a second crystal orientation K2. The determining section 9b determines the orientation in the length direction NH when the first focal point P1 is relatively moved along the line M3 for each processing angle α. The adjusting section 9d continuously changes the orientation determined by the determining section 9b in accordance with the processing angle α while the first focal point P1 is relatively moved along the line M3. Thus, even when the object 100 is a wafer having the (100) plane as the main surface, it is possible to more reliably suppress the quality of the trimmed surface of the object 100 from being reduced at various locations on the line M3.

[第4實施形態] 其次,說明關於第4實施形態之雷射加工裝置。在第4實施形態的說明中,說明關於與第3實施形態不同的點,省略與第3實施形態重複之說明。[Fourth Implementation] Next, the laser processing device of the fourth implementation will be described. In the description of the fourth implementation, the differences from the third implementation will be described, and the descriptions that are repeated with the third implementation will be omitted.

如圖65所示,線M3係包含第1部分M3A、第2部分M3B及第3部分M3C。第1部分M3A係以線M3與第2結晶方位K2正交的1點作為0°的點之情況,包含5°的點到15°的點之間的部分、從95°的點到105°的點之間的部分、從185°的點到195°的點之間的部分及從275°的點到285°的點之間的部分。第2部分M3B係為與第1部分M3A分離之線M3的部分。第2部分M3B係以線M3與第2結晶方位K2正交的1點作為0°的點之情況,包含從75°的點到85°的點之間的部分、從145°的點到175°的點之間的部分、從55°的點到85°的點之間的部分及從55°的點到85°的點之間的部分。第3部分M3C係位於第1部分M3A與第2部分M3B之間的部分。As shown in FIG. 65 , the line M3 includes the first part M3A, the second part M3B, and the third part M3C. The first part M3A is a point where the line M3 intersects the second crystal orientation K2 orthogonally as the 0° point, and includes the part between the 5° point and the 15° point, the part between the 95° point and the 105° point, the part between the 185° point and the 195° point, and the part between the 275° point and the 285° point. The second part M3B is a part of the line M3 separated from the first part M3A. The second portion M3B is a portion from the point of 75° to the point of 85°, a portion from the point of 145° to the point of 175°, a portion from the point of 55° to the point of 85°, and a portion from the point of 55° to the point of 85°, with the point at which the line M3 intersects the second crystal orientation K2 at right angles as the 0° point. The third portion M3C is a portion located between the first portion M3A and the second portion M3B.

本實施形態的決定部9b係依據藉由取得部9a所取得的對象物資訊及線資訊,將第1部分M3A之長度方向NH的方位決定成第1方位,讓長度方向NH與加工行進方向BD交叉。決定部9b係依據對象物資訊及線資訊,將第2部分M3B之長度方向NH的方位決定成第2方位,讓長度方向NH與加工行進方向BD交叉。The determination unit 9b of this embodiment determines the orientation of the length direction NH of the first part M3A to be the first orientation based on the object information and line information obtained by the acquisition unit 9a, so that the length direction NH intersects with the processing direction BD. The determination unit 9b determines the orientation of the length direction NH of the second part M3B to be the second orientation based on the object information and line information, so that the length direction NH intersects with the processing direction BD.

本實施形態的調整部9d,係調整第1部分M3A之長度方向NH的方位,用以成為被決定的第1方位。本實施形態的調整部9d,係調整第2部分M3B之長度方向NH的方位,用以成為被決定的第2方位。調整部9d係在沿著第1部分M3A使第1聚光點P1相對地移動後,再沿著第2部分M3B使第1聚光點P1相對地移動的情況,在線M3的第3部分M3C,將長度方向NH的方位從第1方位改變成第2方位。The adjustment section 9d of this embodiment adjusts the orientation of the first portion M3A in the longitudinal direction NH to be the determined first orientation. The adjustment section 9d of this embodiment adjusts the orientation of the second portion M3B in the longitudinal direction NH to be the determined second orientation. The adjustment section 9d changes the orientation of the longitudinal direction NH from the first orientation to the second orientation at the third portion M3C of the line M3 by relatively moving the first focal point P1 along the first portion M3A and then relatively moving the first focal point P1 along the second portion M3B.

在本實施形態的雷射加工裝置101,例如實施以下所述的修整加工。In the laser processing apparatus 101 of the present embodiment, for example, the trimming process described below is performed.

依據對象物資訊及線資訊,藉由決定部9b,將線M3的第1部分M3A之長度方向NH的方位決定成第1方位,將線M3的第2部分M3B之長度方向NH的方位決定成第2方位。Based on the object information and the line information, the determining unit 9b determines the orientation of the first portion M3A of the line M3 in the longitudinal direction NH to be the first orientation, and determines the orientation of the second portion M3B of the line M3 in the longitudinal direction NH to be the second orientation.

藉由調整部9d,將長度方向NH的方位調整成第1方位(參照圖66(b))。如圖66(a)所示,一邊使載置台107旋轉一邊照射第1雷射光L1,沿著線M3的第1部分M3A,使長度方向NH的方位為第1方位之光束形狀71的第1聚光點P1相對地移動。藉此,在對象物100之Z方向的預定位置,沿著第1部分M3A形成改質區域4。The orientation of the longitudinal direction NH is adjusted to the first orientation by the adjusting section 9d (see FIG. 66(b)). As shown in FIG. 66(a), the first laser light L1 is irradiated while the stage 107 is rotated, and the first focal point P1 of the beam shape 71 whose orientation in the longitudinal direction NH is the first orientation is relatively moved along the first portion M3A of the line M3. In this way, the modified region 4 is formed along the first portion M3A at a predetermined position in the Z direction of the object 100.

如圖67(a)所示,持續一邊使載置台107旋轉一邊照射第1雷射光L1,沿著線M3的第3部分M3C使第1聚光點P1相對地移動。藉此,在對象物100之Z方向的預定位置,沿著線M3的第3部分M3C形成改質區域4。在沿著第3部分M3C形成改質區域4的期間,如圖67(b)所示,藉由調整部9d,將長度方向NH的方位從第1方位改變成第2方位。As shown in FIG. 67(a), the first laser light L1 is continuously irradiated while the stage 107 is rotated, and the first focal point P1 is relatively moved along the third portion M3C of the line M3. Thus, the modified region 4 is formed along the third portion M3C of the line M3 at a predetermined position in the Z direction of the object 100. While the modified region 4 is being formed along the third portion M3C, as shown in FIG. 67(b), the orientation in the longitudinal direction NH is changed from the first orientation to the second orientation by the adjustment portion 9d.

接著,如圖68(a)所示,持續一邊使載置台107旋轉一邊照射第1雷射光L1,沿著線M3的第2部分M3B,使長度方向NH的方位為第2方位之光束形狀71的第1聚光點P1相對地移動。藉此,在對象物100之Z方向的預定位置,沿著第2部分M3B形成改質區域4。Next, as shown in FIG. 68( a), the first laser light L1 is continuously irradiated while the stage 107 is rotated, and the first focal point P1 of the beam shape 71 whose orientation in the longitudinal direction NH is the second orientation is relatively moved along the second portion M3B of the line M3. Thus, a modified region 4 is formed along the second portion M3B at a predetermined position in the Z direction of the object 100.

接著,持續一邊使載置台107旋轉一邊照射第1雷射光L1,沿著線M3的第3部分M3C使第1聚光點P1相對地移動。藉此,在對象物100之Z方向的預定位置,沿著線M3的第3部分M3C形成改質區域4。在沿著第3部分M3C形成改質區域4的期間,藉由調整部9d,將長度方向NH的方位從第2方位改變成第1方位。Next, the first laser beam L1 is continuously irradiated while the stage 107 is rotated, and the first focal point P1 is relatively moved along the third portion M3C of the line M3. Thus, the modified region 4 is formed along the third portion M3C of the line M3 at a predetermined position in the Z direction of the object 100. While the modified region 4 is being formed along the third portion M3C, the orientation in the longitudinal direction NH is changed from the second orientation to the first orientation by the adjustment portion 9d.

將這樣沿著線M3之第1聚光點P1的移動,從第1雷射光L1照射開始直到載置台107旋轉1圈(旋轉360°)為止反覆進行後,停止該照射。改變修整預定位置的Z方向位置,反覆進行前述雷射加工。藉由以上方式,在對象物100的內部,沿著有效區域R的周緣之線M3,於Z方向上形成複數列的改質區域4。The movement of the first focal point P1 along the line M3 is repeated from the start of the irradiation of the first laser light L1 until the stage 107 rotates one circle (rotates 360 degrees), and then the irradiation is stopped. The Z direction position of the trimming predetermined position is changed, and the above laser processing is repeated. In the above manner, a plurality of rows of modified areas 4 are formed in the Z direction along the line M3 of the periphery of the effective area R inside the object 100.

在本實施形態的雷射加工裝置101,於線M3的第1部分M3A,在光束形狀71的長度方向NH與加工行進方向BD交叉之狀態下,沿著線M3使第1聚光點P1相對地移動。藉此,例如,僅在光束形狀71的長度方向NH與加工行進方向BD一致的狀態下,沿著線M3,使第1聚光點P1相對地移動,使得在因對象物100的物性引起在線M3的第1部分M3A之修整面的品質降低這種情況,也能抑制這種修整面的品質降低。因此,若依據本實施形態的雷射加工裝置101,可抑制去除了作為外緣部分之去除區域E之對象物100的修整面的品質會依據部位不同而降低的情事。In the laser processing device 101 of the present embodiment, the first focal point P1 is relatively moved along the line M3 in the first portion M3A of the line M3 in a state where the longitudinal direction NH of the beam shape 71 intersects with the processing direction BD. Thus, for example, only in a state where the longitudinal direction NH of the beam shape 71 coincides with the processing direction BD, the first focal point P1 is relatively moved along the line M3, so that even if the quality of the trimmed surface of the first portion M3A of the line M3 is degraded due to the physical properties of the object 100, the deterioration of the quality of the trimmed surface can be suppressed. Therefore, according to the laser processing device 101 of the present embodiment, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the quality of the trimmed surface of the object 100 from which the removal area E as the outer edge portion is removed depending on the portion.

在本實施形態的雷射加工裝置101,決定部9b係依據藉由取得部9a所取得的對象物資訊及線資訊,將與第1部分M3A分離的第2部分M3B之長度方向NH的方位決定成第2方位,讓長度方向NH與加工行進方向BD交叉。調整部9d,係調整第2部分M3B之長度方向NH的方位,用以成為藉由決定部9b所決定的第2方位。藉此,可更確實地抑制相互分離的第1部分M3A及第2部分M3B中,對象物100的修整面的品質降低的情事。In the laser processing device 101 of the present embodiment, the determination unit 9b determines the orientation of the longitudinal direction NH of the second part M3B separated from the first part M3A to be the second orientation based on the object information and line information obtained by the acquisition unit 9a, so that the longitudinal direction NH intersects with the processing direction BD. The adjustment unit 9d adjusts the orientation of the longitudinal direction NH of the second part M3B to become the second orientation determined by the determination unit 9b. In this way, the quality reduction of the trimmed surface of the object 100 in the first part M3A and the second part M3B separated from each other can be more reliably suppressed.

在本實施形態的雷射加工裝置101,在沿著第1部分M3A使第1聚光點P1相對地移動後,再沿著第2部分M3B使第1聚光點P1相對地移動的情況,調整部9d係在位於第1部分M3A與第2部分M3B之間的第3部分M3C,將長度方向NH的方位從第1方位改變成第2方位。又,同樣地在沿著第2部分M3B使第1聚光點P1相對地移動後,再沿著第1部分M3A使第1聚光點P1相對地移動的情況,調整部9d係在位於第2部分M3B與第1部分M3A之間的第3部分M3C,將長度方向NH的方位從第2方位改變成第1方位。In the laser processing device 101 of the present embodiment, after the first light-converging point P1 is relatively moved along the first portion M3A, the first light-converging point P1 is relatively moved along the second portion M3B, and the adjustment unit 9d changes the orientation of the longitudinal direction NH from the first orientation to the second orientation at the third portion M3C located between the first portion M3A and the second portion M3B. Similarly, after the first light-converging point P1 is relatively moved along the second portion M3B, the first light-converging point P1 is relatively moved along the first portion M3A, and the adjustment unit 9d changes the orientation of the longitudinal direction NH from the second orientation to the first orientation at the third portion M3C located between the second portion M3B and the first portion M3A.

藉此,可更確實地抑制相互分離的第1部分M3A及第2部分M3B中,對象物100的修整面的品質降低的情事。關於光束角度β,在作為重要的角度區域之第1部分M3A及第2部分M3B,設成為最適當角度,在第1部分M3A與第2部分M3B之間且不易受到光束角度β影響之第3部分M3C,可執行該切換。能夠謀求手法提升與較高的加工品質之兩立。This can more reliably suppress the deterioration of the quality of the trimmed surface of the object 100 in the first part M3A and the second part M3B that are separated from each other. With regard to the beam angle β, the first part M3A and the second part M3B, which are important angle regions, are set to the most appropriate angle, and the third part M3C, which is between the first part M3A and the second part M3B and is not easily affected by the beam angle β, can be switched. It is possible to achieve both technique improvement and higher processing quality.

在本實施形態的雷射加工裝置101,對象物100係為以(100)面作為主面,且具有與一方的(110)面垂直之第1結晶方位K1、及與另一方的(110)面垂直之第2結晶方位K2之晶圓。線M3係在從與該主面垂直的方向觀看的情況,呈圓環狀延伸。在線M3與第2結晶方位K2正交的1點作為0°的點之情況,第1部分M3A係包含5°的點到15°的點之間的部分。第2部分M3B係包含從55°的點到85°的點之間的部分。藉此,即使在對象物100為以(100)面作為主面的晶圓之情況,亦可抑制對象物100的修整面的品質依據部位不同而降低的情事。In the laser processing device 101 of the present embodiment, the object 100 is a wafer having a (100) plane as a main surface, and having a first crystal orientation K1 perpendicular to the (110) plane on one side, and a second crystal orientation K2 perpendicular to the (110) plane on the other side. The line M3 extends in a circular ring shape when viewed from a direction perpendicular to the main surface. When a point at which the line M3 intersects the second crystal orientation K2 is taken as a point of 0°, the first part M3A includes a portion between a point of 5° and a point of 15°. The second part M3B includes a portion between a point of 55° and a point of 85°. Thus, even when the object 100 is a wafer having a (100) plane as a main surface, it is possible to suppress the quality of the trimmed surface of the object 100 from being reduced depending on the location.

在本實施形態的雷射加工裝置101,第1方位及第2方位,係以第1結晶方位K1及第2結晶方位K2中之與加工行進方向BD之間的角度較大的一方(更遠離的一方)接近的方式,對加工行進方向BD傾斜之方向的方位。藉此,即使在對象物100為以(100)面作為主面的晶圓之情況,亦可更確實地抑制分別在互相分離的第1部分M3A及第2部分M3B中,對象物100的修整面的品質降低的情事。In the laser processing device 101 of the present embodiment, the first orientation and the second orientation are orientations in a direction inclined to the processing direction BD in such a manner that the first crystal orientation K1 and the second crystal orientation K2, whichever has a larger angle with the processing direction BD (the further away), are close to each other. Thus, even when the object 100 is a wafer having a (100) plane as a main surface, it is possible to more reliably suppress the degradation of the quality of the trimmed surface of the object 100 in the first part M3A and the second part M3B separated from each other.

在本實施形態的雷射加工裝置101,第1方位及第2方位,係以第1結晶方位K1及第2結晶方位K2中之與加工行進方向BD之間的角度較大的一方接近的方式,從加工行進方向BD傾斜10°~35°之方向的方位。藉此,即使在對象物100為以(100)面作為主面的晶圓之情況,亦可更確實地抑制分別在互相分離的第1部分M3A及第2部分M3B中,對象物100的修整面的品質降低的情事。In the laser processing device 101 of the present embodiment, the first orientation and the second orientation are orientations inclined by 10° to 35° from the processing direction BD in such a manner that the first crystal orientation K1 and the second crystal orientation K2 are close to the one with a larger angle with the processing direction BD. Thus, even when the object 100 is a wafer with the (100) plane as the main surface, it is possible to more reliably suppress the degradation of the quality of the trimmed surface of the object 100 in the first part M3A and the second part M3B separated from each other.

在本實施形態的雷射加工方法,分別於互相分離的第1部分M3A及第2部分M3B,在光束形狀71的長度方向NH與加工行進方向BD交叉之狀態下,沿著線M3使第1聚光點P1相對地移動。藉此,例如,僅在光束形狀71的長度方向NH與加工行進方向BD一致的狀態下,沿著線M3,使第1聚光點P1相對地移動,使得在因對象物100的物性引起分別在第1部分M3A及第2部分M3B之修整面的品質降低這種情況,也能抑制這種修整面的品質降低。因此,可抑制去除了去除區域E之對象物100的修整面的品質會依據部位不同而降低的情事。In the laser processing method of the present embodiment, the first light-converging point P1 is relatively moved along the line M3 in the state where the longitudinal direction NH of the beam shape 71 and the processing direction BD intersect each other in the first part M3A and the second part M3B, respectively. Thus, for example, only in the state where the longitudinal direction NH of the beam shape 71 and the processing direction BD coincide with each other, the first light-converging point P1 is relatively moved along the line M3, so that even if the quality of the trimmed surface of the first part M3A and the second part M3B is degraded due to the physical properties of the object 100, the deterioration of the quality of the trimmed surface can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the quality of the trimmed surface of the object 100 from which the removal area E is removed depending on the part.

[變形例] 以上,本發明的一態樣係不限於前述實施形態。[Variations] The above is an aspect of the present invention that is not limited to the aforementioned implementation.

在前述實施形態,對象物資訊係包含關於對象物100的結晶方位之資訊,但若為關於對象物的資訊的話,亦可包含其他各種的資訊。對象物資訊還可以包含關於對象物100的物性之其他資訊,亦可進一步包含對象物100的形狀及尺寸等的資訊。在前述實施形態,線資訊係包含關於沿著線M3之加工行進方向BD(聚光點的移動方向)之資訊,但,若為關於沿著線M3使聚光點移動的情況之該線M3的資訊的話,則,亦可包含其他各種資訊。In the aforementioned embodiment, the object information includes information on the crystal orientation of the object 100, but if it is information on the object, it may also include various other information. The object information may also include other information on the physical properties of the object 100, and may further include information on the shape and size of the object 100. In the aforementioned embodiment, the line information includes information on the processing direction BD (moving direction of the focal point) along the line M3, but if it is information on the line M3 in the case of moving the focal point along the line M3, it may also include various other information.

在前述實施形態,有關於沿著線M3使第1聚光點P1相對地移動的情況之光束形狀71的長度方向NH的方位(光束角度β)之資訊係藉由使用者的操作或來自於外部的通訊等輸入至控制部9之情況。在此情況,取得部9a係取得關於長度方向NH的方位之輸入資訊。決定部9b係依據該輸入資訊,決定長度方向NH的方位。被輸入的長度方向NH的方位係依據線M3的延伸方向及對象物100之物性等,為關於線M3及對象物100之資訊。亦即,關於長度方向NH的方位之輸入資訊係可對應於對象物資訊及線資訊。再者,被輸入的長度方向NH的方位,可針對線M3的各區域(各部分)、每個加工角度α或加工角度區域進行輸入,亦可作為數值、範圍或運算式進行輸入。In the aforementioned embodiment, information on the orientation (beam angle β) of the beam shape 71 in the longitudinal direction NH when the first focal point P1 is relatively moved along the line M3 is input to the control unit 9 by user operation or external communication. In this case, the acquisition unit 9a acquires the input information on the orientation in the longitudinal direction NH. The determination unit 9b determines the orientation in the longitudinal direction NH based on the input information. The input orientation in the longitudinal direction NH is information about the line M3 and the object 100 based on the extension direction of the line M3 and the physical properties of the object 100. That is, the input information on the orientation in the longitudinal direction NH can correspond to the object information and the line information. Furthermore, the input orientation of the longitudinal direction NH may be input for each region (part) of the line M3, each processing angle α, or a processing angle region, and may also be input as a numerical value, a range, or an expression.

在前述實施形態,亦可沿著線M3之N個各別的區域(部分),使第1聚光點P1相對地移動的情況之長度方向NH的方位亦第1~第N方位進行決定(N為3以上的整數)。又,亦可在分別沿著第1~第N區域使第1聚光點P1相對地移動而形成改質區域4的情況,將長度方向NH的方位分別調整成第1~第N方位。In the above-mentioned embodiment, when the first light-converging point P1 is relatively moved along N respective regions (portions) of the line M3, the orientation of the longitudinal direction NH can also be determined in the first to Nth orientations (N is an integer greater than 3). Furthermore, when the first light-converging point P1 is relatively moved along the first to Nth regions to form the modified region 4, the orientation of the longitudinal direction NH can be adjusted to the first to Nth orientations.

上記實施形態,亦可作為照射部,具備複數個雷射加工頭。例如圖69所示,除了照射第1雷射光之第1雷射加工頭10A以外,亦可具有照射第2雷射光之第2雷射加工頭10B。The above-mentioned embodiment may also include a plurality of laser processing heads as the irradiation section. For example, as shown in FIG. 69 , in addition to the first laser processing head 10A for irradiating the first laser light, a second laser processing head 10B for irradiating the second laser light may be included.

第2雷射加工頭10B係對載置於載置台107之對象物100,沿著Z方向照射第2雷射光,在該對象物100的內部形成改質區域。第2雷射加工頭10B係安裝於第2Z軸軌道106B及X軸軌道108。第2雷射加工頭10B係藉由馬達等的習知驅動裝置之驅動力,沿著第2Z軸軌道106B,可朝Z方向直線狀移動。第2雷射加工頭10B係藉由馬達等的習知驅動裝置之驅動力,沿著X軸軌道108,可朝X方向直線狀移動。第1雷射加工頭10A與第2雷射加工頭10B,內部構造係經由旋轉軸C而互相成為鏡像。關於其他結構,第2雷射加工頭10B係與第1雷射加工頭10A同樣地構成。The second laser processing head 10B irradiates the object 100 placed on the mounting table 107 with the second laser light in the Z direction to form a modified area inside the object 100. The second laser processing head 10B is mounted on the second Z-axis track 106B and the X-axis track 108. The second laser processing head 10B can be linearly moved in the Z direction along the second Z-axis track 106B by the driving force of a known driving device such as a motor. The second laser processing head 10B can be linearly moved in the X direction along the X-axis track 108 by the driving force of a known driving device such as a motor. The first laser processing head 10A and the second laser processing head 10B have internal structures that are mirror images of each other via the rotation axis C. Regarding other structures, the second laser processing head 10B is configured similarly to the first laser processing head 10A.

第2Z軸軌道106B為沿著Z方向延伸的軌道。第2Z軸軌道106B係經由安裝部66而安裝於第2雷射加工頭10B。第2Z軸軌道106B係第2雷射加工頭10B沿著Z方向移動,讓第2雷射光的第2聚光點沿著Z方向移動。第2Z軸軌道106B係對應於前述移動機構6(參照圖1)或前述移動機構300(參照圖8)的軌道。第2Z軸軌道106B係構成垂直移動機構。The second Z-axis track 106B is a track extending along the Z direction. The second Z-axis track 106B is mounted on the second laser processing head 10B via the mounting portion 66. The second Z-axis track 106B allows the second laser processing head 10B to move along the Z direction, so that the second focal point of the second laser light moves along the Z direction. The second Z-axis track 106B corresponds to the track of the aforementioned moving mechanism 6 (refer to FIG. 1 ) or the aforementioned moving mechanism 300 (refer to FIG. 8 ). The second Z-axis track 106B constitutes a vertical moving mechanism.

在具備作為照射部之第1及第2雷射加工頭10A、10B的情況,在前述第1處理,沿著線M3的第1區域M31使第1雷射光L1的第1聚光點P1相對地移動而形成改質區域,並且使在線M3的第1區域M31以外的區域之改質區域的形成停止。在前述第2處理,沿著線M3的第2區域M32使第2雷射光的第2聚光點相對地移動而形成改質區域,並且使在線M3的第2區域M32以外的區域之改質區域的形成停止。調整部9d係在執行第1處理的情況,將第1雷射光L1的光束形狀71之長度方向NH的方位調整成為第1方位,在執行第2處理的情況,將第2雷射光之光束形狀的長度方向的方位調整成為第2方位。In the case of the first and second laser processing heads 10A and 10B as the irradiation section, in the first process, the first focal point P1 of the first laser light L1 is relatively moved along the first area M31 of the line M3 to form a modified area, and the formation of the modified area in the area other than the first area M31 of the line M3 is stopped. In the second process, the second focal point P1 of the second laser light L1 is relatively moved along the second area M32 of the line M3 to form a modified area, and the formation of the modified area in the area other than the second area M32 of the line M3 is stopped. The adjustment unit 9d adjusts the orientation of the beam shape 71 of the first laser light L1 in the longitudinal direction NH to the first orientation when performing the first processing, and adjusts the orientation of the beam shape of the second laser light in the longitudinal direction to the second orientation when performing the second processing.

在具備作為照射部之第1及第2雷射加工頭10A、10B的情況,能夠並列(同時)地執行第1處理與第2處理。藉此,能夠達到手法提升。在具備作為照射部之第1及第2雷射加工頭10A、10B的情況,亦可在時間上各別(不同時間)執行第1處理與第2處理。在具備作為照射部之第1及第2雷射加工頭10A、10B的情況,亦可為第1及第2雷射加工頭10A、10B發揮協調作用而在Z方向的預定位置,形成一列的改質區域4。在具備作為照射部之第1及第2雷射加工頭10A、10B的情況,亦可為藉由第1雷射加工頭10A,形成一列的改質區域4,並且在與其不同的Z方向位置,藉由第2雷射加工頭10B,形成一列的改質區域4。In the case of the first and second laser processing heads 10A and 10B as the irradiation section, the first processing and the second processing can be performed in parallel (simultaneously). In this way, the technique can be improved. In the case of the first and second laser processing heads 10A and 10B as the irradiation section, the first processing and the second processing can be performed separately (at different times) in time. In the case of the first and second laser processing heads 10A and 10B as the irradiation section, the first and second laser processing heads 10A and 10B can also play a coordinated role to form a row of modified areas 4 at predetermined positions in the Z direction. In the case of having the first and second laser processing heads 10A and 10B as irradiation sections, a row of modified regions 4 may be formed by the first laser processing head 10A, and a row of modified regions 4 may be formed by the second laser processing head 10B at a different position in the Z direction.

又,例如亦可如圖70所示的雷射加工裝置800,具備4個雷射加工頭。雷射加工裝置800係對於如圖69所示的雷射加工裝置101,還具備第3及第4雷射加工頭10C、10D、第3及第4Z軸軌道106C、106D以及Y軸軌道109。For example, the laser processing device 800 shown in Fig. 70 may include four laser processing heads. The laser processing device 800 is the laser processing device 101 shown in Fig. 69 , and further includes third and fourth laser processing heads 10C, 10D, third and fourth Z-axis tracks 106C, 106D, and a Y-axis track 109.

第3雷射加工頭10C係對載置於載置台107之對象物100,沿著Z方向照射第3雷射光,在該對象物100的內部形成改質區域4。第3雷射加工頭10C係安裝於第3Z軸軌道106C及Y軸軌道109。第3雷射加工頭10C係藉由馬達等的習知驅動裝置之驅動力,沿著第3Z軸軌道106C,可朝Z方向直線狀移動。第3雷射加工頭10C係藉由馬達等的習知驅動裝置之驅動力,沿著Y軸軌道109,可朝Y方向直線狀移動。關於其他結構,第3雷射加工頭10C係與第1雷射加工頭10A同樣地構成。The third laser processing head 10C irradiates the object 100 placed on the mounting table 107 with the third laser light in the Z direction to form a modified area 4 inside the object 100. The third laser processing head 10C is mounted on the third Z-axis track 106C and the Y-axis track 109. The third laser processing head 10C can be linearly moved in the Z direction along the third Z-axis track 106C by the driving force of a known driving device such as a motor. The third laser processing head 10C can be linearly moved in the Y direction along the Y-axis track 109 by the driving force of a known driving device such as a motor. Regarding other structures, the third laser processing head 10C is constructed in the same manner as the first laser processing head 10A.

第4雷射加工頭10D係對載置於載置台107之對象物100,沿著Z方向照射第4雷射光,在該對象物100的內部形成改質區域4。第4雷射加工頭10D係安裝於第4Z軸軌道106D及Y軸軌道109。第4雷射加工頭10D係藉由馬達等的習知驅動裝置之驅動力,沿著第4Z軸軌道106D,可朝Z方向直線狀移動。第4雷射加工頭10D係藉由馬達等的習知驅動裝置之驅動力,沿著Y軸軌道109,可朝Y方向直線狀移動。關於其他結構,第4雷射加工頭10D係與第1雷射加工頭10A同樣地構成。第3雷射加工頭10C與第4雷射加工頭10D,內部構造係經由旋轉軸C而互相成為鏡像。The fourth laser processing head 10D irradiates the object 100 placed on the mounting table 107 with the fourth laser light in the Z direction to form a modified area 4 inside the object 100. The fourth laser processing head 10D is mounted on the fourth Z-axis track 106D and the Y-axis track 109. The fourth laser processing head 10D can be linearly moved in the Z direction along the fourth Z-axis track 106D by the driving force of a known driving device such as a motor. The fourth laser processing head 10D can be linearly moved in the Y direction along the Y-axis track 109 by the driving force of a known driving device such as a motor. Regarding other structures, the fourth laser processing head 10D is constructed in the same manner as the first laser processing head 10A. The third laser processing head 10C and the fourth laser processing head 10D have internal structures that are mirror images of each other via the rotation axis C.

第3Z軸軌道106C為沿著Z方向延伸的軌道。第3Z軸軌道106C係經由與安裝部65相同的安裝部865而安裝於第3雷射加工頭10C。第3Z軸軌道106C係使第3雷射加工頭10C沿著Z方向移動,讓第3雷射光的第3聚光點沿著Z方向移動。第3Z軸軌道106C係構成垂直移動機構。The 3rd Z-axis track 106C is a track extending along the Z direction. The 3rd Z-axis track 106C is mounted on the 3rd laser processing head 10C via the mounting portion 865 which is the same as the mounting portion 65. The 3rd Z-axis track 106C moves the 3rd laser processing head 10C along the Z direction and moves the 3rd focal point of the 3rd laser light along the Z direction. The 3rd Z-axis track 106C constitutes a vertical movement mechanism.

第4Z軸軌道106D為沿著Z方向延伸的軌道。第4Z軸軌道106D係經由與安裝部66相同的安裝部866而安裝於第4雷射加工頭10D。第4Z軸軌道106D係使第4雷射加工頭10D沿著Z方向移動,讓第4雷射光的第4聚光點沿著Z方向移動。第4Z軸軌道106D係構成垂直移動機構。The 4th Z-axis track 106D is a track extending along the Z direction. The 4th Z-axis track 106D is mounted on the 4th laser processing head 10D via the mounting portion 866 which is the same as the mounting portion 66. The 4th Z-axis track 106D moves the 4th laser processing head 10D along the Z direction and moves the 4th focal point of the 4th laser light along the Z direction. The 4th Z-axis track 106D constitutes a vertical movement mechanism.

Y軸軌道109為沿著Y方向延伸的軌道。Y軸軌道109係分別安裝於第3及第4Z軸軌道106C、106D。Y軸軌道109係使第3雷射加工頭10C沿著Y方向移動,讓第3雷射光的第3聚光點沿著Y方向移動。Y軸軌道109係使第4雷射加工頭10D沿著Y方向移動,讓第4雷射光的第4聚光點沿著Y方向移動。Y軸軌道109係使第3及第4雷射加工頭10C、10D移動,讓第3及第4聚光點通過旋轉軸C或其附近。Y軸軌道109係對應於移動機構400(參照圖8)的軌道。Y軸軌道109係構成水平移動機構。X軸軌道108與Y軸軌道109係配置成高度位置不同。例如配置成X軸軌道108為下側、Y軸軌道109為上側。The Y-axis track 109 is a track extending along the Y direction. The Y-axis track 109 is mounted on the 3rd and 4th Z-axis tracks 106C and 106D, respectively. The Y-axis track 109 moves the 3rd laser processing head 10C along the Y direction, so that the 3rd focal point of the 3rd laser light moves along the Y direction. The Y-axis track 109 moves the 4th laser processing head 10D along the Y direction, so that the 4th focal point of the 4th laser light moves along the Y direction. The Y-axis track 109 moves the 3rd and 4th laser processing heads 10C and 10D so that the 3rd and 4th focal points pass through the rotation axis C or its vicinity. The Y-axis track 109 corresponds to the track of the moving mechanism 400 (refer to FIG. 8 ). The Y-axis track 109 constitutes a horizontal movement mechanism. The X-axis track 108 and the Y-axis track 109 are arranged at different heights. For example, the X-axis track 108 is arranged at the lower side and the Y-axis track 109 is arranged at the upper side.

在前述實施形態,採用反射型空間光調變器34作為成形部,但,成形部不限於空間光調變器,可採用各種裝置或光學系統。例如,作為成形部,可採用橢圓光束光學系統、狹縫光學系統或散光光學系統等。又,亦可將光柵圖案使用於調變圖案,讓聚光點分歧而將2點以上的聚光點組合,藉此作成具有長度方向NH之光束形狀71。又,亦可藉由利用偏振光,作成具有長度方向NH之光束形狀71,使偏振光方向旋轉之方法,可藉由例如使1/2λ波長板旋轉來達成。又,空間光調變器不限於反射型,亦可採用透過型空間光調變器。In the aforementioned embodiment, a reflective spatial light modulator 34 is used as a forming part, but the forming part is not limited to the spatial light modulator, and various devices or optical systems can be used. For example, as the forming part, an elliptical beam optical system, a slit optical system, or an astigmatism optical system can be used. In addition, a grating pattern can be used as a modulation pattern to make the focal points diverge and combine more than two focal points to form a beam shape 71 with a length direction NH. In addition, a beam shape 71 with a length direction NH can be formed by using polarized light, and a method of rotating the direction of polarized light can be achieved by, for example, rotating a 1/2λ wavelength plate. In addition, the spatial light modulator is not limited to a reflective type, and a transmissive spatial light modulator can also be used.

在前述實施形態,藉由以加工控制部9c控制第1雷射光L1或其光學系統,切換改質區域4的形成及其停止,但,不限於此。亦可利用習知的各種技術,達成改質區域4的形成及其停止。例如,亦可藉由在對象物100上直接設置光罩將第1雷射光L1遮光,切換改質區域4的形成及其停止。In the above-mentioned embodiment, the formation and stop of the modified area 4 are switched by controlling the first laser light L1 or its optical system by the process control unit 9c, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The formation and stop of the modified area 4 can also be achieved by using various known techniques. For example, the formation and stop of the modified area 4 can also be switched by directly setting a mask on the object 100 to shield the first laser light L1.

在前述實施形態,對象物100的種類、對象物100的形狀、對象物100的尺寸、對象物100所具有的結晶方位的數量及方向、以及對象物100的主面之面方位,未特別限定。在前述實施形態,線M3的形狀未特別限定。在前述實施形態,亦可為決定部9b僅決定第1方位及第2方位中的其中一方,調整部9d將長度方向NH的方位調整成為該其中一方。In the above-mentioned embodiment, the type of the object 100, the shape of the object 100, the size of the object 100, the number and direction of the crystal orientations of the object 100, and the plane orientation of the main surface of the object 100 are not particularly limited. In the above-mentioned embodiment, the shape of the line M3 is not particularly limited. In the above-mentioned embodiment, the determination section 9b may determine only one of the first orientation and the second orientation, and the adjustment section 9d may adjust the orientation of the longitudinal direction NH to the one of the first orientation and the second orientation.

在前述實施形態,以對象物100的背面100b作為雷射光射入面,但,亦可以對象物100的表面100a作為雷射光射入面。在前述實施形態,改質區域4亦可為例如形成於對象物100的內部之結晶區域、再結晶區域、吸除區域。結晶區域係維持對象物100的加工前的構造之區域。再結晶區域係暫時蒸發、電漿化或熔融後,再凝固時,作為單結晶或多結晶凝固之區域。吸除區域係發揮將重金屬等的雜質收集並捕獲之吸除效果的區域,可連續地形成,亦可斷續地形成。又,例如亦可為加工裝置能適用於剝蝕電漿等的加工。In the aforementioned embodiment, the back side 100b of the object 100 is used as the laser light incident surface, but the surface 100a of the object 100 may also be used as the laser light incident surface. In the aforementioned embodiment, the modified area 4 may also be, for example, a crystallization area, a recrystallization area, or a gettering area formed inside the object 100. The crystallization area is an area that maintains the structure of the object 100 before processing. The recrystallization area is an area that solidifies as a single crystal or multiple crystals when solidifying after temporary evaporation, plasma or melting. The gettering area is an area that exerts a gettering effect to collect and capture impurities such as heavy metals, and may be formed continuously or intermittently. In addition, for example, the processing device may be applicable to processing such as stripping plasma.

前述實施形態之雷射加工裝置亦可不具備取得部9a。前述實施形態之雷射加工方法,亦可不包含取得對象物資訊及線資訊之製程(資訊取得製程)。在此情況,例如預先決定要進行雷射加工的對象物100等,預先記憶對象物資訊及線資訊。The laser processing apparatus of the aforementioned embodiment may not include the acquisition unit 9a. The laser processing method of the aforementioned embodiment may not include a process for acquiring object information and line information (information acquisition process). In this case, for example, the object 100 to be laser processed is determined in advance, and the object information and line information are stored in advance.

前述實施形態及變形例之各結構,不限於前述材料及形狀,能適用各種材料及形狀。又,前述實施形態或變形例之各結構,能夠任意適用於其他實施形態或變形例之各結構。The structures of the aforementioned embodiments and modifications are not limited to the aforementioned materials and shapes, and can be applied to various materials and shapes. In addition, the structures of the aforementioned embodiments or modifications can be arbitrarily applied to the structures of other embodiments or modifications.

1,101,800:雷射加工裝置 4:改質區域 9:控制部 9a:取得部 9b:決定部 9c:加工控制部 9d:調整部 10A:第1雷射加工頭(照射部) 10B:第2雷射加工頭(照射部) 10C:第3雷射加工頭(照射部) 10D:第4雷射加工頭(照射部) 34:反射型空間光調變器(成形部) 71:光束形狀(聚光區域的一部分之形狀) 100:對象物 100a:表面(主面) 100b:裏面(主面、雷射光射入面) 107:載置台(支承部) K1:第1結晶方位(結晶方位) K2:第2結晶方位(結晶方位) L1:第1雷射光(雷射光) L2:第2雷射光(雷射光) M3:線 M31:第1區域(第1部分) M32:第2區域(第1部分) M3A:第1部分 M3B:第2部分 M3C:第3部分 NH:長度方向 P1:第1聚光點(聚光區域的一部分)1,101,800: Laser processing device 4: Modified area 9: Control unit 9a: Acquisition unit 9b: Determination unit 9c: Processing control unit 9d: Adjustment unit 10A: First laser processing head (irradiation unit) 10B: Second laser processing head (irradiation unit) 10C: Third laser processing head (irradiation unit) 10D: Fourth laser processing head (irradiation unit) 34: Reflection type spatial light modulator (shaping unit) 71: Beam shape (shape of a part of the focusing area) 100: Object 100a: Surface ( Main surface) 100b: Inner surface (main surface, laser light incident surface) 107: Support table (support part) K1: First crystal orientation (crystal orientation) K2: Second crystal orientation (crystal orientation) L1: First laser light (laser light) L2: Second laser light (laser light) M3: Line M31: First area (first part) M32: Second area (first part) M3A: First part M3B: Second part M3C: Third part NH: Longitudinal direction P1: First focal point (part of the focal area)

[圖1]係實施形態之雷射加工裝置的斜視圖。 [圖2]係為圖1中所示之雷射加工裝置的一部分之正面圖。 [圖3]係為圖1中所示之雷射加工裝置的雷射加工頭之正面圖。 [圖4]係為圖3中所示之雷射加工頭之側面圖。 [圖5]為圖3中所示之雷射加工頭的光學系統之構成圖。 [圖6]係變形例之雷射加工頭的光學系統之構成圖。 [圖7]係變形例之雷射加工裝置的一部分之正面圖。 [圖8]係變形例之雷射加工裝置的斜視圖。 [圖9]係顯示第1實施形態之雷射加工裝置的概略結構之平面圖。 [圖10(a)]係顯示對象物的例子之平面圖。[圖10(b)]係圖10(a)所示的對象物之側面圖。 [圖11(a)]係用來說明第1實施形態之修整加工的對象物之側面圖。[圖11(b)]係顯示圖11(a)後續的對象物之平面圖。[圖11(c)]係圖11(b)所示的對象物之側面圖。 [圖12(a)]係顯示圖11(b)後續的對象物之側面圖。[圖12(b)]係顯示圖12(a)後續的對象物之平面圖。 [圖13(a)]係顯示圖12(b)後續的對象物之平面圖。[圖13(b)]係圖13(a)所示的對象物之側面圖。[圖13(c)]係用來說明第1實施形態之研磨加工的對象物之側面圖。 [圖14]係成為第1實施形態之修整加工的對象之對象物的平面圖。 [圖15(a)]係用來說明第1實施形態之修整加工的主要部分之對象物的平面圖。[圖15(b)]係顯示圖15(a)的雷射加工時之光束形狀的圖。 [圖16(a)]係顯示圖15(a)後續的對象物之平面圖。[圖16(b)]係顯示圖16(a)的雷射加工時之光束形狀的圖。 [圖17]係顯示以圖9的雷射加工裝置執行雷射加工的情況之第1運用例的時間圖表。 [圖18]係顯示以圖9的雷射加工裝置執行雷射加工的情況之第2運用例的時間圖表。 [圖19]係顯示以圖9的雷射加工裝置執行雷射加工的情況之第3運用例的時間圖表。 [圖20]係顯示以圖9的雷射加工裝置執行雷射加工的情況之第4運用例的時間圖表。 [圖21(a)]係顯示使光束形狀的長度方向與加工行進方向一致之情況的修整加工後的對象物的一部分之照片圖。[圖21(b)]係顯示藉由圖9的雷射加工裝置之修整加工後的對象物的一部分之照片圖。 [圖22(a)]係顯示使光束形狀的長度方向與加工行進方向一致之情況的修整加工後的對象物的一部分之照片圖。[圖22(b)]係顯示藉由圖9的雷射加工裝置之修整加工後的對象物的一部分之照片圖。 [圖23]係顯示修整加工後的對象物的一部分之圖。 [圖24]係顯示將使光束角度及加工角度改變的情況之加工品質進行評價的實驗結果之表格。 [圖25]係顯示圖24的實驗結果之對象物的修整面的照片圖。 [圖26]係顯示圖24的實驗結果之對象物的修整面的照片圖。 [圖27]係顯示圖24的實驗結果之對象物的修整面的照片圖。 [圖28]係顯示圖24的實驗結果之對象物的修整面的照片圖。 [圖29]係顯示圖24的實驗結果之對象物的修整面的照片圖。 [圖30]係顯示圖24的實驗結果之對象物的修整面的照片圖。 [圖31]係顯示圖24的實驗結果之對象物的修整面的照片圖。 [圖32]係顯示圖24的實驗結果之對象物的修整面的照片圖。 [圖33]係顯示圖24的實驗結果之對象物的修整面的照片圖。 [圖34]係顯示圖24的實驗結果之對象物的修整面的照片圖。 [圖35]係顯示圖24的實驗結果之對象物的修整面的照片圖。 [圖36]係顯示圖24的實驗結果之對象物的修整面的照片圖。 [圖37]係顯示圖24的實驗結果之對象物的修整面的照片圖。 [圖38]係顯示圖24的實驗結果之對象物的修整面的照片圖。 [圖39]係顯示圖24的實驗結果之對象物的修整面的照片圖。 [圖40]係顯示圖24的實驗結果之對象物的修整面的照片圖。 [圖41]係顯示圖24的實驗結果之對象物的修整面的照片圖。 [圖42]係顯示圖24的實驗結果之對象物的修整面的照片圖。 [圖43]係顯示圖24的實驗結果之對象物的修整面的照片圖。 [圖44]係顯示圖24的實驗結果之對象物的修整面的照片圖。 [圖45]係顯示圖24的實驗結果之對象物的修整面的照片圖。 [圖46]係顯示圖24的實驗結果之對象物的修整面的照片圖。 [圖47]係顯示圖24的實驗結果之對象物的修整面的照片圖。 [圖48]係顯示圖24的實驗結果之對象物的修整面的照片圖。 [圖49]係顯示圖24的實驗結果之對象物的修整面的照片圖。 [圖50]係顯示圖24的實驗結果之對象物的修整面的照片圖。 [圖51]係顯示圖24的實驗結果之對象物的修整面的照片圖。 [圖52]係顯示圖24的實驗結果之對象物的修整面的照片圖。 [圖53]係顯示圖24的實驗結果之對象物的修整面的照片圖。 [圖54]係顯示圖24的實驗結果之對象物的修整面的照片圖。 [圖55(a)]係用來說明第2實施形態之修整加工的主要部分之對象物的平面圖。[圖55(b)]係顯示圖55(a)的雷射加工時之光束形狀的圖。 [圖56(a)]係顯示圖55(a)後續的對象物之平面圖。[圖56(b)]係顯示圖56(a)的雷射加工時之光束形狀的圖。 [圖57(a)]係顯示圖56(a)後續的對象物之平面圖。[圖57(b)]係顯示圖57(a)的雷射加工時之光束形狀的圖。 [圖58(a)]係顯示圖57(a)後續的對象物之平面圖。[圖58(b)]係顯示圖58(a)的雷射加工時之光束形狀的圖。 [圖59(a)]係用來說明光束形狀的方位的切換之圖。[圖59(b)]係用來說明光束形狀的方位的切換之其他圖。 [圖60(a)]係用來說明第3實施形態之修整加工的主要部分之對象物的平面圖。[圖60(b)]係顯示圖60(a)的雷射加工時之光束形狀的圖。 [圖61(a)]係顯示圖60(a)後續的對象物之平面圖。[圖61(b)]係顯示圖61(a)的雷射加工時之光束形狀的圖。 [圖62(a)]係顯示圖61(a)後續的對象物之平面圖。[圖62(b)]係顯示圖62(a)的雷射加工時之光束形狀的圖。 [圖63(a)]係顯示圖62(a)後續的對象物之平面圖。[圖63(b)]係顯示圖63(a)的雷射加工時之光束形狀的圖。 [圖64(a)]係顯示圖63(a)後續的對象物之平面圖。[圖64(b)]係顯示圖64(a)的雷射加工時之光束形狀的圖。 [圖65]係成為第4實施形態之修整加工的對象之對象物的平面圖。 [圖66(a)]係用來說明第4實施形態之修整加工的主要部分之對象物的一部分平面圖。[圖66(b)]係顯示圖66(a)的雷射加工時之光束形狀的圖。 [圖67(a)]係顯示圖66(a)後續的對象物之一部分平面圖。[圖67(b)]係顯示圖67(a)的雷射加工時之光束形狀的圖。 [圖68(a)]係顯示圖67(a)後續的對象物之一部分平面圖。[圖68(b)]係顯示圖68(a)的雷射加工時之光束形狀的圖。 [圖69]係顯示變形例之雷射加工裝置的概略結構之平面圖。 [圖70]係顯示其他變形例之雷射加工裝置的概略結構之平面圖。 [圖71(a)]係顯示關於具有散光之第1雷射光的聚光點附近之雷射光射入面側的光束形狀之圖。[圖71(b)]係顯示關於具有散光之第1雷射光的聚光點附近之雷射光射入面側與其相反面側之間的光束形狀之圖。[圖71(c)]係顯示關於具有散光之第1雷射光的聚光點附近之雷射光射入面側的相反面側之光束形狀之圖。 [圖72(a)]係顯示關於使用狹縫或橢圓光學系統的情況之第1雷射光的聚光點附近之雷射光射入面側的光束形狀之圖。[圖72(b)]係顯示關於使用狹縫或橢圓光學系統的情況之第1雷射光的聚光點的光束形狀之圖。[圖72(c)]係顯示關於使用狹縫或橢圓光學系統的情況之第1雷射光的聚光點附近之雷射光射入面側的相反側的光束形狀之圖。[FIG. 1] is an oblique view of a laser processing device of an embodiment. [FIG. 2] is a front view of a portion of the laser processing device shown in FIG. 1. [FIG. 3] is a front view of a laser processing head of the laser processing device shown in FIG. 1. [FIG. 4] is a side view of the laser processing head shown in FIG. 3. [FIG. 5] is a configuration diagram of an optical system of the laser processing head shown in FIG. 3. [FIG. 6] is a configuration diagram of an optical system of a laser processing head of a modified example. [FIG. 7] is a front view of a portion of a laser processing device of a modified example. [FIG. 8] is an oblique view of a laser processing device of a modified example. [FIG. 9] is a plan view showing a schematic structure of the laser processing device of the first embodiment. [FIG. 10(a)] is a plan view showing an example of an object. [FIG. 10(b)] is a side view of the object shown in FIG. 10(a). [Fig. 11(a)] is a side view of an object to be processed for the first embodiment. [Fig. 11(b)] is a plan view of an object subsequent to Fig. 11(a). [Fig. 11(c)] is a side view of the object shown in Fig. 11(b). [Fig. 12(a)] is a side view of an object subsequent to Fig. 11(b). [Fig. 12(b)] is a plan view of an object subsequent to Fig. 12(a). [Fig. 13(a)] is a plan view of an object subsequent to Fig. 12(b). [Fig. 13(b)] is a side view of an object shown in Fig. 13(a). [Fig. 13(c)] is a side view of an object to be processed for the first embodiment. [FIG. 14] is a plan view of an object to be subjected to trimming processing of the first embodiment. [FIG. 15(a)] is a plan view of an object used to explain the main part of trimming processing of the first embodiment. [FIG. 15(b)] is a diagram showing the beam shape during laser processing of FIG. 15(a). [FIG. 16(a)] is a plan view of an object subsequent to FIG. 15(a). [FIG. 16(b)] is a diagram showing the beam shape during laser processing of FIG. 16(a). [FIG. 17] is a time chart showing the first operation example when laser processing is performed by the laser processing device of FIG. 9. [FIG. 18] is a time chart showing the second operation example when laser processing is performed by the laser processing device of FIG. 9. [Figure 19] is a time chart showing the third operation example of the laser processing performed by the laser processing device of Figure 9. [Figure 20] is a time chart showing the fourth operation example of the laser processing performed by the laser processing device of Figure 9. [Figure 21(a)] is a photograph showing a portion of the object after trimming processing in which the longitudinal direction of the beam shape is aligned with the processing direction. [Figure 21(b)] is a photograph showing a portion of the object after trimming processing by the laser processing device of Figure 9. [Figure 22(a)] is a photograph showing a portion of the object after trimming processing in which the longitudinal direction of the beam shape is aligned with the processing direction. [Figure 22(b)] is a photograph showing a portion of the object after trimming processing by the laser processing device of Figure 9. [Figure 23] is a diagram showing a portion of the object after trimming. [Figure 24] is a table showing the experimental results of evaluating the processing quality when the beam angle and the processing angle are changed. [Figure 25] is a photograph of the trimmed surface of the object showing the experimental results of Figure 24. [Figure 26] is a photograph of the trimmed surface of the object showing the experimental results of Figure 24. [Figure 27] is a photograph of the trimmed surface of the object showing the experimental results of Figure 24. [Figure 28] is a photograph of the trimmed surface of the object showing the experimental results of Figure 24. [Figure 29] is a photograph of the trimmed surface of the object showing the experimental results of Figure 24. [Figure 30] is a photograph of the trimmed surface of the object showing the experimental results of Figure 24. [Figure 31] is a photograph of the trimmed surface of the object showing the experimental results of Figure 24. [Figure 32] is a photograph of the trimmed surface of the object showing the experimental results of Figure 24. [Figure 33] is a photograph of the trimmed surface of the object showing the experimental results of Figure 24. [Figure 34] is a photograph of the trimmed surface of the object showing the experimental results of Figure 24. [Figure 35] is a photograph of the trimmed surface of the object showing the experimental results of Figure 24. [Figure 36] is a photograph of the trimmed surface of the object showing the experimental results of Figure 24. [Figure 37] is a photograph of the trimmed surface of the object showing the experimental results of Figure 24. [Figure 38] is a photograph of the trimmed surface of the object showing the experimental results of Figure 24. [Figure 39] is a photograph of the trimmed surface of the object showing the experimental results of Figure 24. [Figure 40] is a photograph of the trimmed surface of the object showing the experimental results of Figure 24. [Figure 41] is a photograph of the trimmed surface of the object showing the experimental results of Figure 24. [Figure 42] is a photograph of the trimmed surface of the object showing the experimental results of Figure 24. [Figure 43] is a photograph of the trimmed surface of the object showing the experimental results of Figure 24. [Figure 44] is a photograph of the trimmed surface of the object showing the experimental results of Figure 24. [Figure 45] is a photograph of the trimmed surface of the object showing the experimental results of Figure 24. [Figure 46] is a photograph of the trimmed surface of the object showing the experimental results of Figure 24. [Figure 47] is a photograph of the trimmed surface of the object showing the experimental results of Figure 24. [Figure 48] is a photograph of the trimmed surface of the object showing the experimental results of Figure 24. [Figure 49] is a photograph of the trimmed surface of the object showing the experimental results of Figure 24. [Figure 50] is a photograph of the trimmed surface of the object showing the experimental results of Figure 24. [Figure 51] is a photograph of the trimmed surface of the object showing the experimental results of Figure 24. [Figure 52] is a photograph of the trimmed surface of the object showing the experimental results of Figure 24. [Figure 53] is a photograph of the trimmed surface of the object showing the experimental results of Figure 24. [Figure 54] is a photograph of the trimmed surface of the object showing the experimental results of Figure 24. [Figure 55(a)] is a plan view of the object used to illustrate the main part of the trimming process of the second embodiment. [Figure 55(b)] is a diagram showing the beam shape during the laser processing of Figure 55(a). [Figure 56(a)] is a plan view of the object following Figure 55(a). [Figure 56(b)] is a diagram showing the beam shape during the laser processing of Figure 56(a). [Figure 57(a)] is a plan view of the object following Figure 56(a). [Figure 57(b)] is a diagram showing the beam shape during the laser processing of Figure 57(a). [Figure 58(a)] is a plan view of the object following Figure 57(a). [Figure 58(b)] is a diagram showing the beam shape during the laser processing of Figure 58(a). [Figure 59(a)] is a diagram for explaining the switching of the orientation of the beam shape. [Figure 59(b)] is another diagram for explaining the switching of the orientation of the beam shape. [Figure 60(a)] is a plan view of the object for explaining the main part of the trimming processing of the third embodiment. [Figure 60(b)] is a diagram showing the beam shape during the laser processing of Figure 60(a). [Figure 61(a)] is a plane view of the object following Figure 60(a). [Figure 61(b)] is a diagram showing the beam shape during the laser processing of Figure 61(a). [Figure 62(a)] is a plane view of the object following Figure 61(a). [Figure 62(b)] is a diagram showing the beam shape during the laser processing of Figure 62(a). [Figure 63(a)] is a plane view of the object following Figure 62(a). [Figure 63(b)] is a diagram showing the beam shape during the laser processing of Figure 63(a). [Figure 64(a)] is a plane view of the object following Figure 63(a). [Figure 64(b)] is a diagram showing the beam shape during the laser processing of Figure 64(a). [Figure 65] is a plan view of an object to be subjected to the trimming process of the fourth embodiment. [Figure 66(a)] is a partial plan view of an object used to explain the main part of the trimming process of the fourth embodiment. [Figure 66(b)] is a diagram showing the beam shape during the laser processing of Figure 66(a). [Figure 67(a)] is a partial plan view of an object subsequent to Figure 66(a). [Figure 67(b)] is a diagram showing the beam shape during the laser processing of Figure 67(a). [Figure 68(a)] is a partial plan view of an object subsequent to Figure 67(a). [Figure 68(b)] is a diagram showing the beam shape during the laser processing of Figure 68(a). [Figure 69] is a plan view showing the schematic structure of a laser processing device of a modified example. [Figure 70] is a plan view showing the schematic structure of a laser processing device of another modified example. [Figure 71(a)] is a diagram showing the beam shape of the laser light incident surface near the focal point of the first laser light with astigmatism. [Figure 71(b)] is a diagram showing the beam shape between the laser light incident surface near the focal point of the first laser light with astigmatism and the opposite surface. [Figure 71(c)] is a diagram showing the beam shape of the laser light incident surface near the focal point of the first laser light with astigmatism. [Figure 72(a)] is a diagram showing the beam shape of the laser light incident surface near the focal point of the first laser light in the case of using a slit or elliptical optical system. [Figure 72(b)] is a diagram showing the beam shape of the laser light incident surface near the focal point of the first laser light in the case of using a slit or elliptical optical system. [Figure 72(c)] is a diagram showing the beam shape of the laser light incident surface near the focal point of the first laser light in the case of using a slit or elliptical optical system.

4:改質區域 4: Improved area

71:光束形狀(聚光區域的一部分之形狀) 71: Beam shape (shape of part of the spotlight area)

100:對象物 100: Object

100n:對準對象 100n: Alignment object

BD:加工行進方向 BD: Processing direction

K1:第1結晶方位(結晶方位) K1: 1st crystal orientation (crystallization orientation)

K2:第2結晶方位(結晶方位) K2: Second crystal orientation (crystallization orientation)

M3:線 M3: Line

M31:第1區域(第1部分) M31: Region 1 (Part 1)

M32:第2區域(第1部分) M32: Area 2 (Part 1)

NH:長度方向 NH: Length direction

Claims (11)

一種雷射加工裝置,係藉由對對象物使聚光區域的一部分配合並照射雷射光,在前述對象物形成改質區域,其特徵為具備:支承部,其係用來支承前述對象物;照射部,其係對藉由前述支承部所支承的前述對象物照射前述雷射光;及控制部,其係控制前述支承部及前述照射部,前述照射部係具有成形部,該成形部是成形前述雷射光,使與前述雷射光的光軸垂直的面內之前述聚光區域的一部分之形狀具有長度方向,前述控制部係具有決定部及調整部,該決定部係依據關於前述對象物的對象物資訊、及關於沿著在前述對象物的外緣的內側呈環狀延伸的線使前述聚光區域的一部分相對地移動的情況之前述線的線資訊,決定沿著前述線使前述聚光區域的一部分相對地移動的情況之前述長度方向的方位,使得前述長度方向與前述聚光區域的一部分之移動方向交叉,該調整部係在沿著前述線使聚光區域的一部分相對地移動的期間,調整前述長度方向的方位,使其成為藉由前述決定部所決定的方位。 A laser processing device forms a modified area on an object by irradiating a portion of a focusing area with laser light on the object, and is characterized by comprising: a support portion for supporting the object; an irradiation portion for irradiating the object supported by the support portion with the laser light; and a control portion for controlling the support portion and the irradiation portion, wherein the irradiation portion has a shaping portion for shaping the laser light so that the shape of the portion of the focusing area in a plane perpendicular to the optical axis of the laser light has a length direction, and the control portion has a determining portion and an adjusting portion. The determining unit determines the orientation of the longitudinal direction when the part of the light-concentrating area is relatively moved along the line, based on the object information about the object and the line information about the line when the part of the light-concentrating area is relatively moved along the line extending in a ring shape inside the outer edge of the object, so that the longitudinal direction intersects with the moving direction of the part of the light-concentrating area, and the adjusting unit adjusts the orientation of the longitudinal direction during the period of relatively moving the part of the light-concentrating area along the line, so that it becomes the orientation determined by the determining unit. 如請求項1所記載之雷射加工裝置,其中,前述對象物資訊係包含關於前述對象物的結晶方位之 資訊,前述線資訊係包含關於前述聚光區域的一部分之移動方向的資訊。 The laser processing device as described in claim 1, wherein the object information includes information about the crystal orientation of the object, and the line information includes information about the moving direction of a part of the focusing area. 如請求項1所記載之雷射加工裝置,其中,前述成形部係含有空間光調變器,前述調整部係藉由控制前述空間光調變器,調整前述長度方向的方位。 The laser processing device as described in claim 1, wherein the forming section includes a spatial light modulator, and the adjusting section adjusts the orientation in the longitudinal direction by controlling the spatial light modulator. 如請求項2所記載之雷射加工裝置,其中,前述成形部係含有空間光調變器,前述調整部係藉由控制前述空間光調變器,調整前述長度方向的方位。 The laser processing device described in claim 2, wherein the forming section includes a spatial light modulator, and the adjusting section adjusts the orientation in the longitudinal direction by controlling the spatial light modulator. 如請求項1至4中任一項所記載之雷射加工裝置,其中,前述決定部係決定第1方位與第2方位,該第1方位是沿著前述線的第1區域使前述聚光區域的一部分相對地移動的情況之前述長度方向的方位,該第2方位是沿著前述線的第2區域使前述聚光區域的一部分相對地移動的情況之前述長度方向的方位,前述調整部係在沿著前述線使前述聚光區域的一部分相對地移動的期間,在前述聚光區域的一部分位於前述第1區域的情況,調整前述長度方向的方位,使其成為前述第1方位,在前述聚光區域的一部分位於前述第2區域的情況,調整前述長度方向的方位,使其成為前述第2方位。 A laser processing device as recited in any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the determining unit determines a first orientation and a second orientation, the first orientation being the orientation in the longitudinal direction when a part of the light-focusing area is relatively moved along the first area of the line, and the second orientation being the orientation in the longitudinal direction when a part of the light-focusing area is relatively moved along the second area of the line, and the adjusting unit adjusts the orientation in the longitudinal direction to the first orientation when a part of the light-focusing area is located in the first area during the relative movement of the part of the light-focusing area along the line, and adjusts the orientation in the longitudinal direction to the second orientation when a part of the light-focusing area is located in the second area. 如請求項5所記載之雷射加工裝置,其中,前述對象物係為以(100)面作為主面,且具有與一方 的(110)面垂直之第1結晶方位、及與另一方的(110)面垂直之第2結晶方位之晶圓,前述線係從與前述主面垂直的方向觀看的情況,呈圓環狀延伸,前述第1區域係包含在沿著前述線使前述聚光區域的一部分相對地移動的情況,前述聚光區域的一部分對前述第1結晶方位之移動方向的角度亦即加工角度為0°以上、未滿45°之區域,前述第2區域係包含在沿著前述線使前述聚光區域的一部分相對地移動的情況,前述加工角度為45°以上、未滿90°之區域。 The laser processing device as described in claim 5, wherein the object is a wafer having a (100) plane as a main plane and having a first crystal orientation perpendicular to the (110) plane on one side and a second crystal orientation perpendicular to the (110) plane on the other side, the line extends in a circular ring shape when viewed from a direction perpendicular to the main plane, the first region includes a region where the angle of the part of the light-concentrating region to the moving direction of the first crystal orientation, i.e., the processing angle, is greater than 0° and less than 45° when a part of the light-concentrating region is relatively moved along the line, and the second region includes a region where the processing angle is greater than 45° and less than 90° when a part of the light-concentrating region is relatively moved along the line. 如請求項6所記載之雷射加工裝置,其中,前述第1方位及前述第2方位係為以前述第1結晶方位及前述第2結晶方位中之與前述移動方向之間所形成的角度較大的方向接近的方式,對前述移動方向傾斜之方向的方位。 The laser processing device as described in claim 6, wherein the first orientation and the second orientation are orientations of a direction inclined to the moving direction in a manner close to the direction with a larger angle formed between the first crystal orientation and the second crystal orientation and the moving direction. 如請求項7所記載之雷射加工裝置,其中,前述第1方位及前述第2方位係為以前述第1結晶方位及前述第2結晶方位中之與前述移動方向之間所形成的角度較大的方向接近的方式,從前述移動方向傾斜10°~35°之方向的方位。 The laser processing device as described in claim 7, wherein the first orientation and the second orientation are orientations inclined by 10° to 35° from the moving direction in a manner close to the direction with a larger angle formed between the first crystal orientation and the second crystal orientation and the moving direction. 如請求項1所記載之雷射加工裝置,其中,前述調整部係在沿著前述線使前述聚光區域的一部分相對地移動的期間,以連續地改變的方式,調整前述長度 方向的方位。 A laser processing device as described in claim 1, wherein the adjustment section adjusts the orientation of the length direction in a continuously changing manner while relatively moving a portion of the focusing area along the line. 如請求項9所記載之雷射加工裝置,其中,前述對象物係為以(100)面作為主面,且具有與一方的(110)面垂直之第1結晶方位、及與另一方的(110)面垂直之第2結晶方位之晶圓,前述決定部係針對前述聚光區域的一部分之移動方向對前述第1結晶方位的每個角度亦即每個加工角度,決定沿著前述線使前述聚光區域的一部分相對地移動的情況之前述長度方向的方位,前述調整部係在沿著前述線使前述聚光區域的一部分相對地移動的期間,因應前述加工角度,連續地改變成藉由前述決定部所決定的方位。 The laser processing device as recited in claim 9, wherein the object is a wafer having a (100) plane as a main plane and having a first crystal orientation perpendicular to one (110) plane and a second crystal orientation perpendicular to the other (110) plane, the determination unit determines the orientation in the longitudinal direction when the part of the light-concentrating area is relatively moved along the line for each angle of the moving direction of the part of the light-concentrating area to the first crystal orientation, i.e., each processing angle, and the adjustment unit continuously changes the orientation determined by the determination unit in accordance with the processing angle while the part of the light-concentrating area is relatively moved along the line. 一種雷射加工方法,係藉由對對象物使聚光區域的一部分配合並照射雷射光,在前述對象物形成改質區域,其特徵為具備:決定製程及調整製程,該決定製程,係依據關於前述對象物的對象物資訊、及關於沿著在前述對象物的外緣的內側呈環狀延伸的線使前述聚光區域的一部分相對地移動的情況之前述線的線資訊,決定沿著前述線使前述聚光區域的一部分相對地移動的情況之長度方向的方位,使得與前述雷射光的光軸垂直的面內之前述聚光區域的一部分之形狀所具有的長度方向與前述聚光區域的一部分之移動方向交叉,該調整製程,係在沿著前述線使聚光區域的一部分相對地移動的期間,調整前述長度方向的方位,使其成為已 被決定的方位。 A laser processing method is to form a modified area on an object by irradiating a portion of a focusing area with laser light on the object, and is characterized by comprising: a determination process and an adjustment process, wherein the determination process is based on object information about the object and line information about a line extending in a ring shape on the inner side of the outer edge of the object to relatively move the portion of the focusing area. The longitudinal direction of the part of the light-collecting area is adjusted so that the longitudinal direction of the shape of the part of the light-collecting area in a plane perpendicular to the optical axis of the laser light intersects with the moving direction of the part of the light-collecting area. The adjustment process is to adjust the longitudinal direction of the part of the light-collecting area to the determined direction while the part of the light-collecting area is relatively moved along the line.
TW108139221A 2018-10-30 2019-10-30 Laser processing device and laser processing method TWI837205B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2018-204114 2018-10-30
JP2018204114 2018-10-30
JP2018234816A JP7120904B2 (en) 2018-10-30 2018-12-14 LASER PROCESSING APPARATUS AND LASER PROCESSING METHOD
JP2018-234816 2018-12-14

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW202033303A TW202033303A (en) 2020-09-16
TWI837205B true TWI837205B (en) 2024-04-01

Family

ID=

Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2011030802A1 (en) 2009-09-10 2011-03-17 アイシン精機株式会社 Laser processing method and laser processing device

Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2011030802A1 (en) 2009-09-10 2011-03-17 アイシン精機株式会社 Laser processing method and laser processing device

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CN113165119B (en) Laser processing device and laser processing method
TW202023729A (en) Laser machining device
TW202025256A (en) Laser machining device
WO2020090905A1 (en) Laser processing device and laser processing method
TWI837205B (en) Laser processing device and laser processing method
WO2021199874A1 (en) Laser processing apparatus, laser processing method, and wafer
WO2021153317A1 (en) Laser processing device and laser processing method
WO2020090894A1 (en) Laser processing device and laser processing method
WO2020090913A1 (en) Laser machining device and laser machining method
TW202400339A (en) Laser machining device and laser machining method
WO2021220607A1 (en) Laser processing apparatus
WO2021149525A1 (en) Laser processing device and laser processing method
TWI837206B (en) Laser processing equipment